JP2019118521A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for enhancing interest in a performance regarding hold display and active display.SOLUTION: Change suggestive performances (a character A, a character B) for suggesting a change in a display mode of active display 30TM003 (round display) include a success mode for changing a display mode of the active display 30TM003 (round display) and a failure mode for not changing a display mode of the active display 30TM003 (round display). The larger the number of execution times of a change suggestive performance in the success mode is, the higher the ratio of execution of a next change suggestive performance is.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-16

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in Patent Document 1, an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display, and a gaming machine is proposed in which the display mode of the active display is changed each time the pseudo continuous variation is executed.

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36)

  In the gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, there is room to improve the interest of information corresponding to variable display.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which improves interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of means M1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variation display of special symbol, fluctuation display of decorative symbol),
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display;
A change suggestion effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect that suggests that the mode of the corresponding display changes
As the change indication effect, the change indication effect executing means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as the change indication effect of the success mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-18 (1) and (2)). Effects that change the mode), and change indication effects of failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-19 (10) and (20), the ball that the character threw is flipped by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode Can be done)
Depending on the number of times the change indication effect of success mode is executed, within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of change to the establishment of reach state, the decorative symbol from the start of change (re-change (false link) after temporary stop) Within the period until the temporary stop of the combination of the symbol pattern or the pseudo run symbol), the next change suggestion effect is in the period from the start of fluctuation to the moment when any ornament symbol on the left, middle, right or left first stops). The ratio to be executed is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-16, in the stage where the second change suggestion effect is performed, the third change is made at a 100% ratio if it is a success mode in both cases. In the case that the suggestion effect is executed, and the one time is the success mode and the one time is the failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by raising the degree of attention to the number of times of execution of the change indication effect.

The game machine of means M2 is
A gaming machine of means M1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the proportion controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the final display of the active display Expectations vary depending on the aspect),
Depending on the number of consecutive change suggestion effects of the success mode, the proportion of the corresponding display is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the number of times the change suggestion effects of the success mode are continuous) The higher the hit, the higher the expectation of jackpot, and even if it is the active display of the same display color, the larger the number of successive changes in the success mode, the higher the chance of winning the jackpot)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give attention to the number of times the change indication effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve interest.

The game machine of means M3 is
A gaming machine of means M1 or means M2,
It is possible to execute variable display of the decoration pattern,
When the change indication effect is being performed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIG. 11-18, when the change indication effect is being performed, temporary stop is not performed for the variable indication of the decoration symbol The change direction does not change either)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change, it is possible to further pay attention to the change suggestion effect.

The game machine of means M4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to M3;
The change indication effect executing means (the effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of change indication effects (for example, a change indication effect in which the character A appears and a change indication effect in which the character B appears).
After executing one type of change indication effect, it is possible to execute different types of change indication effects (for example, after performing a change indication effect in which character A appears, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1)) , And as shown in FIG. 11-18 (4), execute the change indication effect that character B appears)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change indication effect.

The game machine of means M5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to M4;
The change suggestion production executing means (the CPU 120 for production control) includes a plurality of change suggestion productions (for example, a change suggestion production in which the character A appears, a change suggestion production in which the character B appears, a change suggestion production in which the character C appears, It is possible to execute a change indication effect in which character D appears,
Depending on the type of the change indication effect, the rate at which the change indication effect of the success mode is executed differs, and the change rate to the corresponding display of the specific aspect changes (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, than the character A) Character D is more likely to execute the change suggestion effect of the success mode, and the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes is higher)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which type of change indication effect is to be performed.

The game machine of means M6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to M5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) includes a plurality of change indication effects (a change indication effect in which character A appears, a change indication effect in which character B appears, a change indication effect in which character C appears, a character D It is possible to carry out a change suggestion effect that
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 11-17, the next change suggestion effect is executed by character A rather than character D High proportion)
A game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which type of change indication effect is to be performed.

  As shown in JP-A-2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine has been proposed which can display a hold icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room to improve the interest in information associated with variable display. The invention according to the means K1 to K7 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual condition, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which improves the interest concerning information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of means K1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variation display of special symbol, fluctuation display of decorative symbol),
Display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) to execute display control of information (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub hold display 30TM004, sub active display 30TM005) corresponding to variable display ,
The display control means executes display control of first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) In the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are possible. It is possible to execute display control of the second information (sub hold display 30TM004, sub active display 30TM005),
The rate at which the aspect of the first information changes and the rate at which the aspect of the second information changes are different (as shown in FIG. 11C, the sub active display 30TM005 is usually the final display mode rather than the active display 30TM003) The rate at which a mode different from the mode is selected is low, and the display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 is less likely to change than the first hold display 30TM001)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information such as the first information and the second information as the information corresponding to the common variable display, thereby improving interest in the information corresponding to the variable display. And the aspect of the first information and the second information can be of interest.

The game machine of means K2 is
A gaming machine of means K1,
As shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the mode of the first information after change and the mode of the second information after change are different, the first suspension display 30TM001b of the blue mode is a blue circle display and , Blue aspect of secondary retention display 30TM 004 b is a blue star display)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the first information and the second information have different modes after the change, so that each information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The game machine of means K3 is
It is a game machine of means K1 or means K2, and
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (The first hold indication 30TM001 and the active indication 30TM003, and the secondary hold indication 30TM004 and the secondary active indication 30TM005 can be simultaneously displayed, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (2))
Depending on the mode of the first information after change and the mode of the second information after change, the proportion controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-3, active) The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is the gold mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, rather than the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. Is more likely to win if the player is in the red mode
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, and the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means K4 is
Any game machine selected from means K1 to means K3;
The display control means (effect control CPU 120)
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first correspondence display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed (active) Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103);
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, it is possible to display the first correspondence display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the first hold display (FIG. 11-9 9) As shown in (10), when the first reserved display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode is shifted to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the red display which is the same display color Form is displayed),
A second hold display (sub hold display 30TM004) as second information is displayed in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105), and a second corresponding to variable display being executed. Display a correspondence display (sub active display 30TM005) in the second information display area (sub pending display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
When the variable display corresponding to the second hold display is started, it is possible to display the second correspondence display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the second hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( 9) and (10), when the auxiliary display 30TM004c in red mode (red star display) is shifted to the secondary active display area 30TM105, the auxiliary display 30TM005c in red mode which is the same display color (red) Star-shaped display is displayed))
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, ie, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information, as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed, thereby making the interest related to the information corresponding to the variable display While being able to improve, it can be interested in the aspect of the 1st corresponding information and the 2nd corresponding information.

The game machine of means K5 is
Any game machine selected from means K1 to means K4,
It has a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for notifying whether it is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
At least a part of the first information display area (the first hold display area 30TM101, the active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is performed,
While the display control means (the CPU 120 for effect control) can make the first information non-display with the execution of the informing effect, the second information may also be displayed secondly while the informing effect is being executed. The information is made visible (as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM 001 and the active display are displayed in accordance with the display of the character “reach !!” at the bottom of the screen. While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the attention to the informing effect is heightened by making the first information non-display, and the second information is continuously displayed, thereby confirming the information on the variable display even while the informing effect is being executed. It can be possible.

The game machine of means K6 is
Any game machine selected from means K1 to means K5,
The display control unit (effect control CPU 120) sets a first correspondence display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display being executed to the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). The second correspondence display (sub active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed in the second information display area (sub pending display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
The aspect of the effect differs between the first action effect performed when the aspect of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect performed when the aspect of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active The active action effect for changing the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears to execute an action to throw a ball, and for the subactive action effect for changing the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005, the character a appears Perform an action to fly the balloon
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved by the difference between the modes of the first action effect and the second action effect.

The game machine of means K7 is
Any game machine selected from means K1 to means K6,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the second information To display the second hold display (sub hold display 30TM004) as the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104),
When the mode of the first hold display changes and when the mode of the second hold display changes, the proportions controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player are different (as shown in FIG. 11-3, active) The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and of the secondary hold display 30TM004 than when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed. The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode changes
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which aspect of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As shown in JP-A-2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine has been proposed which can display a hold icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room to improve the interest in information associated with variable display. The invention according to means L1 to L7 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual condition, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which improves the interest of information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of means L1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variation display of special symbol, fluctuation display of decorative symbol),
Display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) to execute display control of information (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub hold display 30TM004, sub active display 30TM005) corresponding to variable display ,
The display control means executes display control of first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) In the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are possible. It is possible to execute display control of the second information (sub hold display 30TM004, sub active display 30TM005),
When the mode of the first information changes, at least a part of the notice effect in the display area different from the first information display area is not executed (as shown in FIG. 11-11, the mode of the first hold display 30TM 001 is When it changes, the secondary hold display area 30TM104 does not display the secondary hold display 30TM004, and the secondary active display area 30TM105 does not display the secondary active display 30TM005)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of information such as the first information and the second information as the information corresponding to the common variable display, complication of the rendering is suppressed and the interest is improved. be able to.

The game machine of means L2 is
A gaming machine of means L1,
As shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the mode of the first information after change and the mode of the second information after change are different, the first suspension display 30TM001b of the blue mode is a blue circle display and , Blue aspect of secondary retention display 30TM 004 b is a blue star display)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the first information and the second information have different modes after the change, so that each information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The game machine of means L3 is
It is a gaming machine of means L1 or L2.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (The first hold indication 30TM001 and the active indication 30TM003, and the secondary hold indication 30TM004 and the secondary active indication 30TM005 can be simultaneously displayed, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (2))
Depending on the mode of the first information after change and the mode of the second information after change, the proportion controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-3, active) The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is the gold mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, rather than the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. Is more likely to win if the player is in the red mode
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, and the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means L4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to L3;
The display control means (effect control CPU 120)
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first correspondence display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed (active) Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103);
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, it is possible to display the first correspondence display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the first hold display (FIG. 11-9 9) As shown in (10), when the first reserved display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode is shifted to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the red display which is the same display color Form is displayed),
A second hold display (sub hold display 30TM004) as second information is displayed in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105), and a second corresponding to variable display being executed. Display a correspondence display (sub active display 30TM005) in the second information display area (sub pending display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
When the variable display corresponding to the second hold display is started, it is possible to display the second correspondence display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the second hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( 9) and (10), when the auxiliary display 30TM004c in red mode (red star display) is shifted to the secondary active display area 30TM105, the auxiliary display 30TM005c in red mode which is the same display color (red) Star-shaped display is displayed))
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, ie, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information, as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed, thereby making the interest related to the information corresponding to the variable display While being able to improve, it can be interested in the aspect of the 1st corresponding information and the 2nd corresponding information.

The game machine of means L5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to L4;
It has a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for notifying whether it is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
At least a part of the first information display area (the first hold display area 30TM101, the active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is performed,
While the display control means (the CPU 120 for effect control) can make the first information non-display with the execution of the informing effect, the second information may also be displayed secondly while the informing effect is being executed. The information is made visible (as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM 001 and the active display are displayed in accordance with the display of the character “reach !!” at the bottom of the screen. While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the attention to the informing effect is heightened by making the first information non-display, and the second information is continuously displayed, thereby confirming the information on the variable display even while the informing effect is being executed. It can be possible.

The game machine of means L6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to L5,
The display control unit (effect control CPU 120) sets a first correspondence display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display being executed to the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). The second correspondence display (sub active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed in the second information display area (sub pending display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
The aspect of the effect differs between the first action effect performed when the aspect of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect performed when the aspect of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active The active action effect for changing the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears to execute an action to throw a ball, and for the subactive action effect for changing the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005, the character a appears Perform an action to fly the balloon
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved by the difference between the modes of the first action effect and the second action effect.

The game machine of means L7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to L6,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the second information To display the second hold display (sub hold display 30TM004) as the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104),
When the mode of the first hold display changes and when the mode of the second hold display changes, the proportions controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player are different (as shown in FIG. 11-3, active) The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and of the secondary hold display 30TM004 than when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed. The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode changes
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which aspect of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), a game machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed each time the pseudo continuous change is executed. It is done. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room to improve the interest regarding information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means N1 to N6 is made in view of the above-mentioned situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which improves the interest concerning information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of means N1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variation display of special symbol, fluctuation display of decorative symbol),
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display;
A change suggestion effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect that suggests that the mode of the corresponding display changes
The change suggestion production executing means, as a change suggestion production, as shown in FIGS. 11-18 (1) and (2) of the success mode, the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM 003 As shown in the effect of changing the display mode and the change indication effect of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character D is flipped by the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode Production that can not
A predetermined period (for example, within a period from the start of fluctuation to the establishment of reach state, a decorative symbol from the start of fluctuation (a combination of decorative symbols or a pseudo-continuous symbol that will be re-fluctuated (temporarily stopped after temporary stop) is temporary) Within the period until the stop, within the period from the start of the change to the first stop of any decorative pattern on the left middle right)) Accordingly, the proportions controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player are different (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect of success mode) with respect to the number of times of execution of change suggestion effect. As the ratio of is higher, the display mode with a high hit probability tends to be high. For example, the display mode in the case of [number of executions of change suggestion effect of success mode / number of executions of change suggestion effect] is 2/3 is blue mode And Display mode when it is 4/5 is more jackpot expected high degree of red aspect.)
A game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by raising the degree of attention to the number of times of execution of the change indication effect.

The game machine of means N2 is
A gaming machine of means N1,
The proportion controlled in the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) differs according to the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003) (as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the big hit expectation is determined by the final display mode of the active display) Different),
Depending on the number of consecutive change suggestion effects of the success mode, the proportion of the corresponding display is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the number of times the change suggestion effects of the success mode are continuous) The higher the hit, the higher the expectation of jackpot, and even if it is the active display of the same display color, the larger the number of successive changes in the success mode, the higher the chance of winning the jackpot)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give attention to the number of times the change indication effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve interest.

Means N3 of gaming machine
It is a gaming machine of means N1 or means N2, and
It is possible to execute variable display of the decoration pattern,
When the change indication effect is being performed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIG. 11-18, when the change indication effect is being performed, temporary stop is not performed for the variable indication of the decoration symbol The change direction does not change either)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change, it is possible to further pay attention to the change suggestion effect.

The game machine of means N4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to N3;
The change indication effect executing means (the effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of change indication effects (for example, a change indication effect in which the character A appears and a change indication effect in which the character B appears).
After executing one type of change indication effect, it is possible to execute different types of change indication effects (for example, after performing a change indication effect in which character A appears, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1)) , And as shown in FIG. 11-18 (4), execute the change indication effect that character B appears)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change indication effect.

The game machine of means N5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to N4;
The change suggestion production executing means (the CPU 120 for production control) includes a plurality of change suggestion productions (for example, a change suggestion production in which the character A appears, a change suggestion production in which the character B appears, a change suggestion production in which the character C appears, It is possible to execute a change indication effect in which character D appears,
Depending on the type of the change indication effect, the rate at which the change indication effect of the success mode is executed differs, and the change rate to the corresponding display of the specific aspect changes (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, than the character A) Character D is more likely to execute the change suggestion effect of the success mode, and the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes is higher)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which type of change indication effect is to be performed.

The game machine of means N6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to N5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) includes a plurality of change indication effects (a change indication effect in which character A appears, a change indication effect in which character B appears, a change indication effect in which character C appears, a character D It is possible to carry out a change suggestion effect that
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 11-17, the next change suggestion effect is executed by character A rather than character D High proportion)
A game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which type of change indication effect is to be performed.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on setting change operation from the outside. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control regarding provision of gaming media. The invention according to means A1 to A9 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual condition, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which appropriately executes control relating to the provision of gaming media.

The game machine of means A1 is
A game apparatus capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, balls, balls, etc. processing related to ball lending to consume prepaid balance, ball lending to consume balls, ball lending to consume balls, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM 050),
Application means (a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling a payout motor 21TM289) for applying game media based on a signal output from the gaming device;
A game that executes processing such as step S21TM1690 etc. that can execute specific control (such as big hit judgment processing in special symbol process processing) according to setting value (setting values 1 to 6 where the range of big hit judgment random numbers is different) Control microcomputer 100),
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling the setting value changeable setting change mode (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200);
Equipped with
When the setting change mode is controlled, the provision of game media based on the signal output from the gaming device is restricted (1. The microcomputer 100 for controlling the game when the setting change mode is controlled Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output to the payout control board 21TM037) 2. The microcomputer for gaming control does not transmit the connection confirmation command when the setting change mode is being controlled. The computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal, 3. When the gaming machine frame opening sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. Do not play game when you are in 4. setting change mode Since the microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command (by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 not receiving the connection confirmation command), even if the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is on, the EXS signal is output. Do not turn on.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when being controlled to the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of gaming media.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the lock switch 21TM051. In addition, based on the clear switch (setting change-over switch) 21TM052 being in the ON state, control is performed to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. While the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 is not executed during the period controlled to the setting change mode, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Do not lend a sphere.

The game machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control that executes timer control processing for game control) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controlling the progress of the game in the game machine,
The game control means has setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
When the special signal (connection confirmation signal) is input from the game control means, the giving means (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) can give a game medium,
The game control means does not output the special signal when controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (a serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 for outputting a connection confirmation signal changes the setting) After the mode ends, it is executed after the setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible not to apply the game medium when being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
The device further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The application means (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the game apparatus, and the game apparatus is based on the fact that the first predetermined signal is input. Game media can be provided based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from
The first predetermined signal is not output when controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (1. The PRDY signal is not turned on when the connection confirmation signal is not input, 2. connection confirmation) PRDY signal is not turned on when the command is not received),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible not to apply the game medium when being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control that executes timer control processing for game control) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controlling the progress of the game in the game machine,
An open state detection unit (in which at least one of the game control means and the giving means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) detects an open state in which a gaming machine frame or a door frame corresponding to the gaming machine is opened. A game machine frame provided with a game machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, the provision of game media is restricted when the open state is detected (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a Does not turn on the PRDY signal) when
It is characterized by
According to this, when the gaming machine frame or the door frame is opened to control in the setting change mode, it is possible to restrict the provision of the game medium.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A4;
The device further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The provision means outputs a provision preparation signal (turns on the EXS signal) in response to the provision request signal being input from the gaming apparatus (the BRQ signal is turned on), and The game medium is applied when the assignment command signal output from the gaming apparatus is input according to the input (when the card unit 21TM 050 detecting the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal),
When controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the provision preparation signal is not output even if the provision request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected to be on). do not do),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible not to apply the game medium when being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A5,
The device further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the setting change mode control means is a clear switch (setting change switch) Control the setting change mode when the 21TM052 is on)
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting switch). Control the setting confirmation mode when the 21TM052 is off)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A6,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed),
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in a blinking manner), the gaming state is initialized To notify that (display the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like of the game arcade to grasp that the control of the setting change mode is ended and the gaming state is initialized.

The game machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A7,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control which executes timer interruption processing for game control) which has the specification control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine;
An effect control unit (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect;
The game control means further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in conjunction with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control relating to notification according to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command to display “setting change in progress” on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. Display “Confirming setting” on the image display 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it can be grasped that the store clerk or the like of the game arcade is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A8,
The device further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 at power on) and initialization operation (operation to turn on the clear switch 21TM052 at power on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. With the control being performed, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the gaming state can be selected.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on setting change operation from the outside. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming apparatus. The invention according to the means B1 to B7 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual condition, and provides a game machine which appropriately executes control based on a signal outputted from the game apparatus.

The game machine of means B1 is
A game apparatus capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, balls, balls, etc. processing related to ball lending to consume prepaid balance, ball lending to consume balls, ball lending to consume balls, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM 050),
Predetermined control means (a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling a payout motor 21TM289) that executes predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming apparatus;
A game that executes processing such as step S21TM1690 etc. that can execute specific control (such as big hit judgment processing in special symbol process processing) according to setting value (setting values 1 to 6 where the range of big hit judgment random numbers is different) Control microcomputer 100),
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling the setting value changeable setting change mode (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200);
It is possible to execute predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming device regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is being controlled (the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode) Even for a period, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, a connection confirmation command and a prize ball number command can be transmitted, and in the connection confirmation signal ON state, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are received. The microcomputer 21TM 370 can execute ball lending regardless of whether it is a period controlled in the setting change mode),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming apparatus, and to avoid the control burden when not executing the predetermined control while being controlled in the setting change mode. .

The game machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The device further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
When the predetermined control is interrupted based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (such as power-off or the like) while the predetermined control is being executed, and the control is subsequently performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting After termination of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is resumed (the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 suspends the ball lending when the power is cut off while the ball lending is being performed, and the power supply is resumed). When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball setting is resumed immediately after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, without resuming the ball rental.
It is characterized by
According to this, even when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the occurrence of the predetermined event, the predetermined control can be appropriately performed.

The game machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The device further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
When the predetermined control is being performed, the predetermined control is ended when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the power-off during the execution of the ball lending is due to termination of the predetermined control). When it occurs, the ball rental is forcibly ended (stopped), and when the microcomputer 100 for game control is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of the power supply restoration thereafter, the ball rental is not resumed, and the setting change Ball lending will not resume even after the end of mode or setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
According to this, the control for resuming the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The game machine of means B4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to B3;
The device further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The setting change mode control means sets the setting change condition when power supply to the gaming machine is started (lock switch 21TM051 is on and clear switch 21TM052 is also on) Control to the setting change mode)
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state). Control to the above setting confirmation mode)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition established when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means B5 is
Any game machine selected from means B1 to B4;
When the setting change mode is controlled, game information is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
When the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, after notifying the change of the setting value (after making the setting value blink on the display monitor 21TM029), notifying that the gaming state has been initialized (display Display the letter "C" on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like of the game arcade to grasp that the control of the setting change mode is ended and the gaming state is initialized.

The game machine of means B6 is
Any game machine selected from means B1 to B5,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control which executes timer interruption processing for game control) which has the specification control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine;
An effect control unit (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect;
The game control means further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in conjunction with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control relating to notification according to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command to display “setting change in progress” on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. Display “Confirming setting” on the image display 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it can be grasped that the store clerk or the like of the game arcade is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means B7 is
Any game machine selected from means B1 to B6,
The device further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 at power on) and initialization operation (operation to turn on the clear switch 21TM052 at power on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. With the control being performed, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the gaming state can be selected.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on setting change operation from the outside. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control when the gaming medium passes through the specific area. The invention according to means C1 to C6 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual condition, and provides a gaming machine which appropriately executes control when a gaming medium passes through a specific area.

The game machine of means C1 is
Specific control (special) according to setting values (setting values 1 to 6 with different ranges of the jackpot determination random numbers) based on the game medium having passed the specific area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) Specific control means (microcomputer 100 for game control that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing the jackpot determination processing etc. in the symbol process processing;
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling the setting value changeable setting change mode (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200);
When the setting change mode is controlled, the specific control is not executed even when the game medium passes the specific area (the setting change mode is controlled before the setting of the timer interrupt (step S21TM1500). The special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed during the period when the setting change mode is being controlled.
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when there is a possibility that the setting value is changed.

The game machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The device further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The setting change mode control means sets the setting change condition when power supply to the gaming machine is started (lock switch 21TM051 is on and clear switch 21TM052 is also on) Control to the setting change mode)
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state). Control to the above setting confirmation mode)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition established when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or C2;
When the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed),
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in a blinking manner), the gaming state is initialized To notify that (display the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like of the game arcade to grasp that the control of the setting change mode is ended and the gaming state is initialized.

The game machine of means C4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to C3;
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control which executes timer interruption processing for game control) which has the specification control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine;
An effect control unit (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect;
The game control means further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in conjunction with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control relating to notification according to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command to display “setting change in progress” on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. Display “Confirming setting” on the image display 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it can be grasped that the store clerk or the like of the game arcade is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means C5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to C4;
The device further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
When the control mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even when the game medium passes through the specific area (the control mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode before the setting of the timer interruption (step S21TM1500) The special symbol process process (big hit determination process) in step S21TM1690 is not executed during the period when the setting confirmation mode is being controlled.
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value is confirmed.

The game machine of means C6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to C5,
The device further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 at power on) and initialization operation (operation to turn on the clear switch 21TM052 at power on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. With the control being performed, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the gaming state can be selected.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on setting change operation from the outside. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value, it is necessary to execute an appropriate process. The invention according to means D1 to D5 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual condition, and provides a gaming machine which executes appropriate processing when power supply is stopped.

The game machine of means D1 is
A game that executes processing such as step S21TM1690 etc. that can execute specific control (such as big hit judgment processing in special symbol process processing) according to setting value (setting values 1 to 6 where the range of big hit judgment random numbers is different) Control microcomputer 100),
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling the setting value changeable setting change mode (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200);
Setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control which can execute step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) which can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value is notified in a checkable manner;
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting value is stored) for storing the setting value;
The setting change mode control means satisfies the first condition when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied (clear switch ( Control to the setting change mode based on the setting change switch) 21TM052 being in the ON state,
The setting confirmation mode control means satisfies the first condition when the power supply to the game machine is started (lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear The setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the switch (setting selection switch) 21TM052 being in the OFF state),
The set value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state),
The setting value storage means stores the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode when being controlled to the setting change mode (stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode) Setting values are continuously stored without being changed with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed (the power is cut off without the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter If the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is notified (control to the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on) If it is set, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately set the set value when the power supply is stopped when the store clerk or the like of the game arcade is controlled to the setting change mode.

The game machine of means D2 is
A gaming machine of means D1,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051) when power supply to the game machine is started and performs an initialization operation (to turn on the clear switch 21TM052) Control the setting change mode when the operation is performed,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization operation is not performed.
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like of the game arcade to select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is to be controlled.

The game machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or D2;
When the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, a notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the set value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029).
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended.

The game machine of means D4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to D3;
Game control means (having a game control timer interrupt process for controlling game control, including the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means, for controlling the progress of the game in the game machine Computer 100),
Providing effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for executing control of effect;
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in conjunction with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes notification according to the command (when the setting confirmation mode command is received, the setting change mode command is displayed on the image display device 5 as “during setting change” is displayed) Display “Confirmation of setting” on the device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it can be grasped that the store clerk or the like of the game arcade is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means D5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to D4;
Timing after power supply to the gaming machine is started (timing after the gaming control microcomputer 100 can execute the gaming control timer interrupt processing after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended) If the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is given (the effect control CPU 120 is a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, a clear switch (setting switch ) When a setting change switch operation command indicating that the 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, "The operation of the lock switch has been detected.", "The operation of the setting change switch has been detected." Display a warning on the image display 5)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like of the game arcade to grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the timing after the power supply is started.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on setting change operation from the outside. Further, as shown in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "big hit signal" and the like are output from an external output terminal of a main control board. With regard to a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device side to know the status of the process related to the change of the setting value. Even if it applies the signal output technology of the conventional game machine described in the open 2014-200506 gazette (paragraph 0102), there exists a subject that it is difficult to grasp this by the external device side. The invention according to means E1 to means E8 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the status of processing related to the change of the setting value by the external device side. is there.

The game machine of means E1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (such as a big hit determination process in special symbol process processing) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 different in the range of random numbers for big hit determination),
The set value can be changed (changeable based on the operation in the setting change mode),
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from the first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) generated in the gaming machine.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to processing (transition to setting change mode, transition to setting confirmation mode) related to the change of the setting value. ,
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the fact that the process related to the change of the setting value has been executed can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The game machine of means E2 is
It is a game machine of means E1,
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of the power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when the RAM clear is executed),
Setting change mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value changeable mode when the power supply to the game machine is started. Equipped
When the setting change mode is controlled, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are simultaneously output).
It is characterized by
According to this, since it is possible to notify outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting change mode may be controlled by the specific signal, the setting change is also made by the specific signal even in the conventional external device not assuming the input of the special signal. It can be understood that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E3 is
A gaming machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on being controlled to the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting correspondence change signal) Continue to output the security signal for 30 seconds after the
It is characterized by
According to this, since it is possible to notify to the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting change mode may be controlled by the specific signal, the setting is made by the specific signal even in the conventional external device not assuming the input of the special signal. It can be understood that the change mode may be controlled.

The game machine of means E4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means E1 to E3;
The device further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The special signal can be output based on control in the setting confirmation mode (a setting correspondence change signal is output during a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The game machine of means E5 is
It is a game machine of means E4,
The setting confirmation mode can be controlled when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is on and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is off). Control based on the setting confirmation mode),
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (simultaneously outputting a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal).
It is characterized by
According to this, since it is possible to notify to the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting confirmation mode may be controlled by the specific signal, the setting confirmation by the specific signal is performed also in the conventional external device not assuming the input of the special signal. It can be understood that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E6 is
It is a game machine of means E1,
Setting change mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value changeable mode when the power supply to the game machine is started. Equipped
The special signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled (the setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (When the RAM clear is executed, the security signal is output when the setting change mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output process in the case of being controlled to the setting change mode.

The game machine of means E7 is
A game machine of means E1 or means E6, wherein
Setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value when power supply to the gaming machine is started Equipped
The special signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode is ended. (When the RAM clear is executed, the security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output process when controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means E8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means E1 to E7,
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling the setting value changeable setting change mode (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200);
And a setting confirmation mode control unit capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240);
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the set value can be changed by the operation of the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and the operation of the lock switch 21TM051),
When the setting change operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 operates the lock switch 21TM051 When I received a lock switch operation command indicating that the setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 was operated from the game control microcomputer 100, I detected the “lock switch operation. "" The operation of the setting change switch has been detected. "Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like of the game arcade to grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on setting change operation from the outside. Further, as shown in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "big hit signal" and the like are output from an external output terminal of a main control board. With regard to a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external apparatus to know information related to the set value, but Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 There is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. (Paragraph 0102). The invention according to the means F1 to F11 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual condition, and provides a gaming machine which can grasp information related to a set value on the external device side.

The game machine of means F1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (such as a big hit determination process in special symbol process processing) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 different in the range of random numbers for big hit determination),
The set value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (changeable based on an operation in the setting change mode),
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change corresponding signal) in response to processing related to the change of the setting value (transition to setting change mode, transition to setting confirmation mode),
The special signal can be output in a special mode that can specify the setting value (a number of pulses corresponding to the setting value is output)
It is characterized by
According to this, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F2 is
A gaming machine of means F1,
It comprises setting change mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) that can control the setting value changeable setting change mode,
The special signal of the special aspect is output along with the end of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode is ended, the number of pulses corresponding to the determined setting value is output).
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to output, from the common terminal, a signal notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means F3
It is a game machine of means F2,
A special signal in a non-special aspect when being controlled to the setting change mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is in an ON state during a period being controlled to the setting change mode) is output, and the setting change mode is ended. Once the output of the special signal is stopped (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned OFF with the end of the setting change mode), the special signal of the special aspect (pulsed setting of the number corresponding to the determined setting value) Output change corresponding signal),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to F3;
The device further includes setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The special signal of the special aspect is output along with the end of the setting confirmation mode (when the setting confirmation mode is ended, the number of pulses corresponding to the displayed setting value is output).
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to output, from the common terminal, a signal notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means F5 is
It is a game machine of means F4,
A special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is in an ON state during a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode) is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the setting confirmation mode ends. Once the output of the special signal is stopped (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode), the special signal of the special aspect (a number of pulse-like signals corresponding to the displayed set value) Output the setting change corresponding signal)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to F5,
In the special signal of the special aspect, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses (a set value can be specified in an external device by setting the number of times of output of the pulse-like setting change corresponding signal equal to the set value) is there),
It is characterized by
According to this, the setting value can be easily identified in the external device.

The game machine of means F7
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to F6,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) generated in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The game machine of means F8
A gaming machine of means F7,
Outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from a common terminal (for example, output from a tenth terminal);
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside with a simple configuration.

The game machine of means F9 is
A gaming machine of means F7,
Outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from different terminals (for example, outputting a security signal from a tenth terminal and outputting a setting change corresponding signal from a seventh terminal);
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a clearly distinguishable manner.

The game machine of means F10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to F9,
It comprises setting change mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) that can control the setting value changeable setting change mode,
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the set value can be changed according to the operation of the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052),
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode, a special signal of the special aspect is output along with the end of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF, The number of pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as the setting change corresponding signal regardless of whether or not the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been previously operated. ,
It is characterized by
According to this, the processing load of the signal output process can be reduced by executing the common signal output process regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is actually performed.

The game machine of means F11 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to F10,
The special signal of the special aspect is output at the end of the process related to the change of the setting value (with the number of pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the end of the setting change mode) And outputs a pulse-like setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the setting confirmation mode is ended) After the output is completed, the special signal of the special aspect is output (stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) at a predetermined timing (for example, the end of the big hit gaming state, etc.) different from the processing related to the change of the setting value. Output a number of pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this, since it becomes possible to notify the setting value to the outside at a predetermined opportunity, it is possible to increase the opportunity for specifying the setting value in the external device.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on setting change operation from the outside. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control regarding provision of gaming media. The invention according to the means G1 to G10 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual condition, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which appropriately executes control relating to the provision of gaming media.

The game machine of means G1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) comprising a giving means (a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling a payout motor 21TM289) capable of giving a gaming value (pachinko balls),
A game that executes processing such as step S21TM1690 etc. that can execute specific control (such as big hit judgment processing in special symbol process processing) according to setting value (setting values 1 to 6 where the range of big hit judgment random numbers is different) Control microcomputer 100),
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the setting value (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600);
An open state detection capable of detecting an open state in which at least one of the gaming machine frame (gaming machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) corresponding to the gaming machine is opened (for example, the gaming machine frame 3) Means (a game machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state; a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state; A payout control microcomputer 21TM370) having a machine frame and door frame opening sensor 21TM300;
When the open state is detected regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, the provision of gaming value is restricted (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame is When 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289, so that the game media is not paid out in the ball lending process and the winning ball process),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, when being controlled to the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of game value.

The game machine of means G2 is
A gaming machine of means G1,
The setting change mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to step S21TM3600) is capable of detecting that the open state detection means (the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state) An open state by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided with a frame open sensor and a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state It is possible to control to the setting change mode when (the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened) is detected (in the case of YES at step S21TM3520, the processing after step S21TM3530 is executed),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being controlled in a state where the open state of the gaming machine frame or the door frame is not detected.

The game machine of means G3 is
A gaming machine of means G1 or G2,
It has specific information storage means (RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100) for storing specific information (value of flag under change in setting) which can specify that the setting change mode is controlled.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped,
The setting change mode control means can be put into the game stop state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. In the control microcomputer 100, when the setting change in progress flag is set after the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state. If the condition for transitioning to the setting change mode and the condition for transitioning to the setting change mode is not satisfied under the condition of being ,, it does not shift to the normal game processing, and loops until the power is shut off),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit after the power supply is resumed, it is possible to set the game to the stop state.

The game machine of means G4 is
A gaming machine of means G3,
In response to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (the value of the setting change flag value) is erased (YES in step S21TM3530 based on the operation to turn off the lock switch 21TM051), and the setting change mode is End and the setting changing flag is cleared in step S21TM 3710),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game processing after the setting change mode ends.

The game machine of means G5 is
Any gaming machine selected from the means G1 to G4;
The game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control which performs timer interruption processing for game control) which controls progress of a game is provided,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which controls the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detecting means, and determines whether to execute the game value based on the detection of the open state. (When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game medium is not dispensed, When neither opening of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected, payout of gaming media is executed),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the giving means for controlling giving of the game value has the open state detecting means, it is easy to determine whether or not to give the game value, and the processing load can be reduced.

The game machine of means G6 is
A gaming machine of means G5,
The application means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289)
Based on the reception of information (the number of payouts) relating to the provision of gaming value from the gaming control means (microcomputer 100 for gaming control executing the timer interruption processing for gaming control), the execution of the gaming value is executed,
It has storage means (RAM 21 TM 302 having a buffer for storing the number of unpaid pieces formed in the backup area in the microcomputer for payout control 21 TM 370) capable of storing the grant information (number of unpaid pieces) relating to the game value to be awarded
The storage means can store the assignment information even after the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped,
The giving means executes giving of the game value according to the giving information stored in the storage means after the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed (the power is shut off while the game medium is being paid out. When it occurs, interrupt the payout of gaming media, resume the payout that was suspended after the power is turned on, and pay out the number of gaming media of the unpaid amount),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to store the grant information on the gaming value to be given after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, it is stored. Since it is possible to grant the gaming value corresponding to the grant information, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player.

The game machine of means G7
Any gaming machine selected from means G1 to G6,
It can be connected to the gaming device (card unit 21TM 050),
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controlling the payout motor 21TM289) executes giving of gaming value based on a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the gaming device,
When the open state is detected, the provision of the gaming value based on the signal output from the gaming device is restricted (a gaming machine frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370, a door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 is for a gaming machine When opening the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, the card unit 21TM050 does not transmit the BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, and payout of gaming media is executed. Not),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the provision of the game value during opening of the gaming machine frame or the door frame is restricted, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect associated with the giving operation during opening the gaming machine frame or the door frame. It becomes possible to smoothly carry out maintenance work and the like while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is opened.

The game machine of means G8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means G1 to G7,
It has setting confirmation mode control means (microcomputer 100 for game control which can execute step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580) which can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode which can confirm the setting value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 at power on) and initialization operation (operation to turn on the clear switch 21TM052 at power on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized,
When the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, step S21TM3040 is performed based on the clear switch 21TM052 being in the ON state). By being determined as YES, the RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050, or the RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3150 when it is determined as YES in step S21TM3140 When the setting confirmation mode is executed If the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state, the determination in step S21TM3040 is NO, or the process does not shift to step S21TM3050, or the determination in step S21TM3140 is NO. Do not want to migrate to step S21TM3150),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state.

The game machine of means G9 is
A gaming machine of means G8,
The storage unit (RAM 21 TM 302 having a buffer for storing the number of unpaid pieces formed in the backup area in the microcomputer for payout control 21 TM 370) is provided, which can store the information (data of the number of unpaid pieces)
The assignment information is initialized as the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (the RAM clear of step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is executed Accordingly, the RAM clear in step S21TM1880 of initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed, so the unpaid number of unpaid pieces storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Number data is initialized),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized including the assignment information on the gaming value to be granted, the management in the gaming shop can be facilitated.

The game machine of means G10 is
A gaming machine of means G8,
The storage unit (RAM 21 TM 302 having a buffer for storing the number of unpaid pieces formed in the backup area in the microcomputer for payout control 21 TM 370) is provided, which can store the information (data of the number of unpaid pieces)
The assignment information is not initialized regardless of whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine has been initialized (step S21TM3050 for initializing the RAM 102 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 or RAM clearing in step S21TM3150 is executed Also, since the RAM clear in step S21TM1880 of initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed, the number of unpaid pieces of unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Data is not initialized),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized, the assignment information is not initialized, and therefore, information relating to the game value to be granted can be appropriately protected.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on setting change operation from the outside. Further, as shown in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "big hit signal" and the like are output from an external output terminal of a main control board. In the case of a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), the external device side causes the occurrence situation of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution situation of processing related to the change of the setting value. It may be necessary to distinguish and recognize, but even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, both are There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize. The invention relating to the means H1 to H5 is made in view of the above situation, and the external device side divides the occurrence situation of the predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution situation of the process related to the change of the setting value. It is providing a gaming machine which can be separately recognized.

The game machine of means H1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing etc. in special symbol process processing) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 different in the range of random numbers for big hit determination),
It is possible to change the setting value,
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame, door frame opening detection, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine, and processing (setting change related to the change of the setting value) Output a specific signal corresponding to the
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event and the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the setting value are different (the security signal is not controlled to the setting change mode because the RAM clear is performed In this case, it is output for 30 seconds, and when the RAM clear is executed and the setting change mode is controlled, a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled in the setting change mode is output),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside of the occurrence of the predetermined event and the fact that the process related to the change of the setting value has been performed in a distinguishable manner.

The game machine of means H2 is
A gaming machine of means H1,
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the setting value (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600);
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The output period of the specific signal differs between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the setting change mode is controlled) Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the above-mentioned period, and is output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled for the setting confirmation mode, when controlled to the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to distinguish between control in the setting change mode and control in the setting confirmation mode externally.

A game machine of means H3
It is a gaming machine of means H1 or H2.
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the setting value (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600);
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 at power on) and initialization operation (operation to turn on the clear switch 21TM052 at power on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 is configured to When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting change switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, “lock switch The image display device 5 is displayed with a warning that “The operation of has been detected.” Or “The operation of the setting change switch has been detected.”,
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The game machine of means H4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means H1 to H3;
It is possible to output a special signal (signal for change of setting) corresponding to the process (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the change of setting value,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, a security signal is output from a tenth terminal and a setting change corresponding signal is output from a seventh terminal ),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the fact that the process related to the change of the setting value has been executed can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the setting value is performed Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

A game machine of means H5
Any gaming machine selected from means H1 to H4;
It is possible to output a special signal (signal for change of setting) corresponding to the process (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the change of setting value,
The special signal can be output in a special mode that can specify a set value (outputs a number of pulses corresponding to the set value)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on setting change operation from the outside. Further, as shown in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "big hit signal" and the like are output from an external output terminal of a main control board. With regard to gaming machines as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device side to know the execution status of processing related to the set value, but in particular, Even if it applies the signal output technology of the conventional game machine described in the open 2014-200506 gazette (paragraph 0102), there exists a subject that it is difficult to grasp this by the external device side. The invention according to means I1 to I6 is made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine capable of grasping the execution status of processing related to the setting value on the external device side. .

The game machine of means I1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing etc. in special symbol process processing) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 different in the range of random numbers for big hit determination),
It is possible to change the setting value,
Start output of a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the setting value,
In response to termination of control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the setting value, the output of the specific signal (security signal) is stopped,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the set value is longer than the predetermined period (when controlled to the setting change mode, the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or longer and controlled to the setting confirmation mode) , Output period of security signal is 50 ms or more),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.

The means I2 gaming machine
A gaming machine of means I1,
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame, door frame open detection, etc.) generated in the gaming machine,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the setting value (the RAM clears the security signal If it is not controlled in the setting change mode, it is output for 30 seconds, and if it is cleared in the RAM and controlled in the setting change mode, it is output for a period in which 30 seconds are added to the period controlled in the setting change mode. ),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside of the occurrence of the predetermined event and the fact that the process related to the change of the setting value has been performed in a distinguishable manner.

The means I3 gaming machine
It is a gaming machine of means I1 or I2.
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the setting value (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600);
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The output period of the specific signal differs between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the setting change mode is controlled) Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the above-mentioned period, and is output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled for the setting confirmation mode, when controlled to the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between control in the setting change mode and control in the setting confirmation mode.

Means I4 game machine
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to I3;
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the setting value (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600);
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (microcomputer 100 for game control capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 at power on) and initialization operation (operation to turn on the clear switch 21TM052 at power on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 is configured to When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting change switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, “lock switch The image display device 5 is displayed with a warning that “The operation of has been detected.” Or “The operation of the setting change switch has been detected.”,
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The means I5 gaming machine
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to I4;
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change corresponding signal) corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the setting value,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, a security signal is output from a tenth terminal and a setting change corresponding signal is output from a seventh terminal ),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the fact that the process related to the change of the setting value has been executed can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the setting value is performed Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The game machine of means I6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to I5,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change corresponding signal) corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the setting value,
The special signal can be output in a special mode that can specify a set value (outputs a number of pulses corresponding to the set value)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine which displays a title for notifying the type of reach effect at the start of reach effect (for example, see JP-A-2016-101428). In the gaming machine as described in JP-A-2016-101428, it is desired to enhance the rendering effect. The invention concerning means J1 to means J8 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual condition, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine having enhanced rendering effects.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the means J1 is:
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing indication effect (for example, reach effect) that is suggested to be controlled to the advantageous state;
And title notification means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of informing a title corresponding to the suggested effect;
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means J2, in the gaming machine of means J1,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the indication effects,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common manner (for example, FIG. 8-2 (C)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which suggestion effect is performed, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means J3 is the gaming machine of means J1 or J2.
At a plurality of execution timings during the suggestion effect execution, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or an advance notice effect) indicating that the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained even after the notification of the title.

In the gaming machine of the means J4, in any gaming machine of the means J1 to the means J3,
The suggestion effect executing means executes at least a first indication effect (for example, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second indication effect (for example, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the indication effect. Is possible,
The title notification means may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect in the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggested effect can be performed, the effect of the effect is improved.

In the game machine of means J5, in the game machine of means J4,
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled may be higher when the first suggested effect is executed than when the second suggested effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J6 is any of the gaming machines of the means J1 to the means J5,
The suggestion effect performing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode associated with a title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J7 is any of the gaming machines of the means J1 to the means J6,
Detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B);
A specific display execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for performing specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection unit;
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
After the first specific display is displayed in the ineffective period of detection by the detection means, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (E, 8-11 (I ),)
During the effective period of detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the second specific display after change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J8 is any of the gaming machines of the means J1 to the means J7,
As a suggested indication that suggests the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggested indication whose display size is the first size (shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. Display etc.) and a second suggestion display (the reach title image 31AK062 etc. of the second size displayed at the time of reach title effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (d)) whose display size is the second size Further comprising means (for example, the image display device 5 and the CPU 120 for effect control);
The display means is
Elements E1 (banana), Element E2 (melon), Element E3 (apple), Element E4 (watermelon), Element E5 (strawberry) as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d). Etc.) can be displayed (the fruit pattern etc. shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a), (d)) can be displayed,
Even when any of the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display is displayed in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d), the display may be such that the elements E1 to E5 are included in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062.
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of fluctuation pattern and reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of advance production determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a preliminary production determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board | substrate, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is an explanatory view showing composition of a part of storage area in RAM of a main board. It is a figure showing a memory map of CPU in a main board. It is a figure showing a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of main board RAM. (A) is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor, (B-1)-(B-6) is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is an explanatory view explaining movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing for game control. It is an explanatory view showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in setting confirmation mode. (1) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled to the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled to the setting confirmation mode FIG. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing an effect aspect of setting suggestion effects, and (4) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining an effect aspect of setting suggestive effects. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of a control signal output from the game control board to the payout control board. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of a control command transmitted and received between the game control board and the payout control board. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission and reception of control signals and control commands. FIG. 17 is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU for payment control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which CPU for payout control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an outline of a ball lending limit method in this embodiment. It is a timing diagram for explaining communication between a card unit and a pachinko game machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st ball lending limit method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd ball lending limit method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 3rd ball lending limit method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 4th ball lending restriction method. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example in which ball lending restriction is not performed in the setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows an example which resumes payment after a setting change mode ends. FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing an example in which the payout is forcibly ended in accordance with the transition to the setting change mode. FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer in a period controlled to the setting change mode. FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during a period in which the game machine frame or the glass door frame is opened. (1) is an explanatory view showing control when a power failure occurs before setting value determination, and (2) is a control showing a control when power failure occurs after setting value confirmation. It is a figure which shows the warning screen when setting change operation is performed during a game. It is explanatory drawing of the signal output from each output terminal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a setting value and the output aspect of a setting change corresponding | compatible signal. It is a timing chart which shows an output mode and an output period of a setting change corresponding signal. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power activation. (1) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the setting value is not a normal value, and (2) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the setting value is a normal value . It is a timing diagram showing a method of limiting ball lending based on the open state detection of the gaming machine frame. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a method of resuming a ball lending after the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting ball lending without shifting to setting change mode after power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to setting change mode after a power-off, and terminating a ball rental forcibly. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to setting change mode and restarting ball lending after power-off. It is a timing diagram showing a method of restricting the award ball payout based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing a method of resuming award ball payout after the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame is finished. FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing a method of resuming award ball payout without shifting to the setting change mode after power-off. FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing a method of shifting to the setting change mode after the power is turned off and forcibly terminating the award ball payout. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to setting change mode, and restarting prize ball payout after power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending | holding display and an active display. It is a flow chart which shows change production determination processing. (A) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for determining a first change effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for determining a second change effect. It is an explanatory view showing the suspension change pattern in the 1st change production. It is an explanatory view showing the suspension change pattern in the 1st change production. It is an explanatory view showing the change change pattern in the 2nd change production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production in the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a production mode about the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a production mode about the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production in the 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect regarding 1st change production | presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect regarding 1st change production | presentation. It is an explanatory view showing the modification of the production mode about the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is an explanatory view showing the modification of the production mode about the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is an explanatory view showing the modification of the production mode about the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern of an active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the kind of change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the presentation aspect of a change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the presentation aspect of a change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the presentation aspect of a change suggestion production.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration etc. of pachinko gaming machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of special symbols (also referred to as special figures) as plural types of special identification information. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  In addition, "variable display" of a special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the special symbol and the variation of the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the aspect which blink-displays a certain symbol is also contained in a fluctuation | variation. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stop as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special view". Also, a special drawing game using the first special drawing is referred to as "first special drawing game", and a special drawing game using the second special drawing is also referred to as "second special drawing game". In addition, one type of special symbol display device for performing variable display of special symbols may be used.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be configured of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (such as a symbol indicating a numeral or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game. Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special view game or the second special view game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, upper and lower) in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Scroll display of direction and update display). Note that the special view game to be executed synchronously and the variable display of the decorative symbol are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area may be provided for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended, or an active display corresponding to the variable display under execution. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of pending variable displays is also referred to as the number of pending storages. The number of pending storages corresponding to the first special view game is also referred to as a first pending storage number, and the number of pending storages corresponding to the second special view game is also referred to as a second pending storage number. The total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is also referred to as the total pending storage number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A includes the number of lighted LEDs. Thus, the first number of pending storages is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second number of pending storages according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first start winning opening which is always kept in a predetermined open state where a gaming ball can enter, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and a first special view game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (normally driven combination) forms a second start winning opening which is changed to a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type part having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the tip of the movable wing pieces Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the gaming ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state where the gaming ball can enter the second start winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start It is also said that the winning opening will be open.). When a game ball enters the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and a second special view game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electrically operated tulip type part.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 has a special winning opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning mouth door (for special electric combination) is in the OFF state, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the game ball easily enters the big winning mouth Become.

  When the game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as winning balls. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, for example, more winning balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

  It is also called "winning" that the game ball enters each winning opening including the general winning opening 10. In particular, winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments of LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also referred to as a common game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided. Based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the common-play game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The common drawing suspension display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common drawing reservation storages, which is the number of common drawing games whose execution is being held, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided in the periphery of the gaming area ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 is provided which operates according to the effect.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like to fire the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided to provide a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting plate (lower plate) from which winning balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided, which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is fired toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when a game ball passes passage gate 41 during a period during execution of the last game of a game (when a game ball passes passage gate 41, but a game game based on the passage can not be executed immediately) The regular game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

  In this common-play game, when a specific normal symbol (per-flat symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol is "per common-word". On the other hand, if an ordinary symbol other than the symbol per common drawing (general drawing loss symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "general drawing lost". When it becomes "per common plan", opening control is performed to open the variable winning prize ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the start winning opening (winning) during the period during execution of the special figure game, and the period controlled to the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state to be described later (start winning is generated When the special figure game based on the starting winning combination can not be executed immediately), the special figure game based on the entry is suspended from being executed up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  If special symbols (big hit symbols such as "7", the actual symbols differ according to the big hit type described later) are displayed as special symbols in the special figure game, they will be "big hits" and they will be big hit symbols If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from that is displayed stopped, it becomes "small hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (a lost symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is a "loss".

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special view game becomes "small hit", the small hit gaming state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. In the open state, of an elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing until the number of gaming balls entering the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period in which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an open upper limit period. A cycle in which the special winning opening is thus opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to execute repeatedly until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

  In the jackpot gaming state, the player can obtain a winning ball by advancing the gaming ball into the big winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

  In the "big hit", a big hit type is set. For example, a large winning opening opening mode (round number and opening upper limit period), a gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.) prepared a plurality of types, according to these The type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type capable of obtaining many prize balls, or a jackpot type with few prize balls or hardly capable of obtaining prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit gaming state, the opening mode similar to the big hit gaming state at the time of some big hit classifications (the number of opening of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same Etc.) the big winning opening is open. As in the case of the big hit type, the "small hit" may be provided with a small hit type.

  After the big hit gaming state ends, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state.

  In the short time state, control (time reduction control) is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure changes) compared to the normal state. In the time saving state, by shortening the average spread map fluctuation time (period for changing the spread map) than in the normal state, or by improving the probability of being “per spread map” in the spread game game, than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that facilitates the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (in particular, the second special symbol) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, probability variation control is performed in which the probability that the display result is a "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state. The probability change state is a state more advantageous to the player because the probability change state of the special symbol is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The time saving state or the probability changing state continues until any one end condition such as the fact that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit gaming state is established first. It is also referred to as “the number of times cut (short in the number of times, short in the number of times definite change, etc.)” as the end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is the end condition.

  The normal state is a gaming state other than the special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player, a short time state, a definite change state, etc., and the display result in the common drawing game is "per common drawing". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special view game will be a "big hit" is a preset state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case of system reset) It is a state controlled in the same way as when the processing was not performed.

  A state in which the probability change control is being performed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not performed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being performed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low base state. In combination, the short time state is also referred to as a low probability high base state, the positive variation state is also referred to as a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high certainty state and the low base state are also referred to as the high certainty base state.

  After the small hit gaming state ends, the change of the gaming state is not performed, and the control result of the special drawing game is continuously controlled to the previous gaming state to become the "small hit" (but the "small hit" occurs) When the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary to have a "small hit" as a display result of the special drawing game.

  The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the gaming ball passes the specific area, it may be controlled to be in the positive changing state after the big hit gaming state.

(Progress of progress etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of informing the progress of the game or boosting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The said effect is demonstrated below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 The operation may be performed by the operation of the movable body 32, etc.

  In the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or (2) In response to the start of the special figure game, variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, the finalized decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived).

  In a period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the aspect of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach aspect (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later, variable display is performed for the decorative symbol not yet stopped and displayed. Is the aspect that is continuing.

  In addition, reach production is executed corresponding to becoming the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative design. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation) in which the display result (display result of the special drawing game or display of the variable display of the decorative symbol) becomes “big hit” according to the presentation mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special view game is "big hit", a finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 The display result of the variable display of the symbol becomes "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, "7" etc.) is displayed on stop on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right". .

  If it is a "probable big hit" controlled to a definite change state after the end of the big hit gaming state, odd decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are aligned and stop displayed, and after the end of the big hit gaming state In the case of "non-probable variation big hit (usually big hit)" which is not controlled, even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be arranged to be stopped and displayed. In this case, an odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and an even number decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation symbol (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with a non-deterministic symbol, a promotion effect that finally becomes a "possibly large hit" may be executed.

  When the display result of the special view game is "small hit", a finalized combination symbol (for example, "a small hit combination defined in advance as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5). 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state of the same aspect as small hit gaming state) and when it becomes "small hit" , A fixed finalized design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special view game is "loss", the display mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, but the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (" Sometimes it is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). Also, when the display result is "loss", a predetermined reach combination which is not a big hit combination ("reach loss") as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes the reach aspect. There is also a case where the finalized decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach loss”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, an advance notice effect or the like for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. The advance notice effects include advance notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display in execution, and pre-reading notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be performed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol temporarily while the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, the variable display is resumed to make one variable display appear as if it were a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo series effect may be performed.

  During the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot during the jackpot to notify the jackpot gaming state is executed. As the jackpot effect, an effect of informing the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the jackpot gaming state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, during the small hitting during the small hitting game state which is notified the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hit gaming state, and some of the big hit type (big hit type of the big hit gaming state of the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type that makes the subsequent gaming state highly probable) Depending on the state, the player may not know whether the present is in the small hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state by executing a common effect. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, a presentation control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, a power supply substrate and the like are arranged.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of suspension), execution of a common drawing game (including management of suspension), big hit It has a function to control gaming state, small hit gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effects control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when performing various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which stored contents are stored for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded on the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 is capable of updating numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated (updated by software) as the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, input ports to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, and first hold. An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the common view hold display 25C and the like, and a solenoid drive signal) is configured.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass) from various switches (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls. A detection signal or the like indicating that the switch has been turned on is entered and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, it is detected that the game ball has passed or entered.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary motorized role and the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. Transmit

  The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), as part of the control of the progress of the game, according to the progress of the game effect control command (command to specify (notice) the progress of the game etc.) effect control board Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main substrate 11 is relayed by the relay substrate 15 and supplied to the effect control substrate 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main substrate 11 (for example, display results of special drawing games (including a big hit type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special drawing games (described in detail later) ), Game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), command for designating occurrence of error and the like are included.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects (various effects corresponding to the progress of the game based on the effect control command received, It has a function of performing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, and the like.

  On the effect control board 12, a CPU 120 for effect control, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the program stored in the ROM 121 to execute the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed) (Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of effects based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when detecting an operation by the player and appropriately indicating the contents of the operation). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes rendering based on a rendering execution instruction from the rendering control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the execution instruction of the effect from the effect control CPU 120. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for specifying a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. And the lamp control board 14 is supplied with a lamp signal (a signal for specifying the lamp on / off mode). Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 has various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9 and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. Do. Thus, the display control unit 123 controls voice output and lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes an audio output, control of lighting / extinguishing of the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 can count value data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects so as to be updateable. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) as the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for capturing the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, and various signals (image signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the voice control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. As in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of sub substrates may be provided for each function, or one sub substrate may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main substrate 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes gaming control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flow chart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, first, the CPU 103 sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initialization is performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, setting of a register of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port or the like), setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply substrate. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 performs, for example, on the image display device 5, screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before it becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes the process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, and the like) for progressing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code), and determines whether the data is normal (step S4) S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of the power supply stop, for example, by the parity bit or the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (Step S5; No), the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 102 (content of backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the gaming state is restored, and when the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by execution of the timer interrupt processing for game control described later. It will be

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control board 12, an effect control command instructing recovery from power failure (step S 7). At the same time, the effect control command for specifying the gaming state before power interruption that has been backed up, or the effect control for specifying the display result of the special figure game in progress when the special figure game is being executed A command may be sent. These commands can use the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been made or that the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the setting of the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Then it enters loop processing. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening are performed via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 have been received (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hit, etc.) supplied to a hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times and the like of the probability variation state) are output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt to realize management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, control of the playing state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the pass gate 41) management of execution and suspension of the common figure game, It enables the release control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per game". The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the general drawing reserve display is displayed by turning on the ordinary drawing suspension display 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power failure occurs, processing for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission of an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, processing for detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a display result (including a big hit type) and a random value for determining a fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, processing may be executed to determine whether the display result or the variation pattern is read ahead. After storing the hold information and the number of held memories, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of start winnings, the number of held memories, and the pre-reading judgment is performed on the effect control board 12 . For example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the effect control command at the start winning combination set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each processing (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process processing, transmission setting for transmitting a rendering control command corresponding to each processing to the rendering control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special view game or the second special view game based on the presence / absence of the hold information and the like. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for display result determination, whether the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" in the case of "big hit" Are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a determined special symbol (one of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special figure game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special view game using the second special view may be executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view (also referred to as special view 2 priority digest). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order termination).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random value are assigned to determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other determinations on the main substrate 11 and various determinations on the effect control substrate 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used using random value for variation pattern determination based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit" or the like. The process of deciding on etc. is included. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process is ended.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (such as presence or absence of reach), and the variable display of the decorative symbol The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is designated, and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process is ended.

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol to be the display result of the special symbol is stop displayed (derived) The process for setting up is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special process process flag is updated to "8". In addition, when the display result is “loss”, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time cut is completed and control is made in the time saving state or the positive change state. When the value of the special drawing process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". This big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process to start the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and set the big winning opening to the open state based on the display result becoming "big hit" etc. It is done. When the special winning opening is opened, processing for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an open upper limit period for setting the big winning opening in an open state, and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set, for example, in accordance with which jackpot type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6", End the process during the big hit open.

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened has reached the set upper limit number of times, or when the upper limit number of times reached the big hit gaming state Includes the process of setting for terminating the program. When the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of rounds has reached the upper limit number of executions, The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special drawing process flag is updated, the big hit release post-processing ends.

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, processing to wait until waiting time corresponding to a period during which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of big hit gaming state, processing corresponding to the end of big hit gaming state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and short time control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process for setting the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit open pre-processing ends.

  The small hit open processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "9". In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closing state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time, etc. Processing for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the small hit gaming state end timing comes, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "10", and the small hit open processing is ended.

  The small hitting end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "10". The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end processing is ended.

(Main operation of presentation control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12 Performs register settings etc. of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing predetermined operation confirmation is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. In addition, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After the command analysis process is performed in step S75, an effect control process process is performed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decoration light such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, the movable body 32 Control to operate various rendering devices is performed, such as driving operation. Further, with regard to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the rendering control command or the like transmitted from the main substrate 11.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number updating process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S73. Before returning to the process of step S73, another process may be performed.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes preread advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the presentation control command at the start winning combination transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Moreover, the process for displaying a pending | holding display is performed based on the pending | holding memory number specified from the said production control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11 or the like. And so on. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the fluctuation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (decision decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, reach effect and various types The presence or absence of execution of various effects such as advance notice effects and the manner and timing of execution start thereof are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) in which the determination result and the like are reflected is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S 171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect control is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read out from the effect control pattern, or the command specifying that the main decorative object 11 is made to stop and display the decorative symbol is received In response to what has been done, the fixed decoration pattern that is the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the finalized decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect processing ends.

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In the waiting process for the special view, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command designating start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command designating start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6 Update to On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the small hit middle effect processing. In addition, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost" when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started. Thus, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the rendering process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process is ended.

  The small hitting middle effect process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In this small hit medium effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Further, in the small hitting medium effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of a command specifying termination of the small hit gaming state from the main substrate 11, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit ending effect. Update to a certain "5" and end small hitting medium effect processing.

  The small hitting end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the CPU 120 for effect control sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and various kinds of effect control at the end of the small hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hitting end effect processing is ended.

  The jackpot inside effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In the big hit internal effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit inside effect processing, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of the command specifying the end of the big hit gaming state from the main board 11 Update to 7 ′ ′ and complete the big hit internal rendering process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., and performs various effect control of ending effect at the end of the big hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value, and the ending effect processing is ended.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the gaming media and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and the light-off of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with at least one of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device etc. may be previously provided. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device of Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, expressions of comparison of various proportions such as the execution proportion of the rendition (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”, etc.) indicate that one is a proportion of “0%”. May be included. For example, it also includes that one is a proportion of “0%” and the other is a proportion of “100%” or a proportion less than “100%”.

(Description of feature portion 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. 8-1 is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this Embodiment, and the kind of reach. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the present embodiment, the change display mode of the decorative design does not become a reach mode, and the non-reach loser fluctuation patterns PA1-1, PA1 in which the display result is “lost”. -2, the variation display pattern of reach loss that the display result becomes "loss" because the mode of the variable display of the decorative design becomes a "reach" change patterns PA2-1-PA2-6, PA3-1-PA3-4, etc., the display result is a big hit The variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and so on, which become "," are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are performed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggested effect which suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. As shown in the number of black stars in Fig. 8-1 (B), the reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super Reach B <Super Reach A is in the order of high. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines becoming a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is performed via normal reach. In addition, during the production of the reach of the super reach, there may be a case in which the development presentation is performed to develop (promote) to a more reliable reach. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8-1 (A) and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are variation patterns corresponding to execution of the development effect. Note that, in FIG. 8A, a variation pattern is shown in which the degree of reliability develops into a super reach one stage higher, but a variation pattern in which the degree of reliability develops by two or more stages is also provided. Also, a variation pattern may be provided in which the development effect is performed a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest degree of reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E with the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach by display only, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and voice. As described above, notification of a title is performed by more rendering devices in the case of the highly reliable reach than in the case of the less reliable reach. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively heard, and the effect of presentation is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title character (such as gothic and Mincho type) and the typeface (such as a line and a calligraphy) may be made different depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the title of reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect contents of the reach effect, and the like.

(Example of production operation of characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following rendering operation is executed by the rendering control CPU 120 executing rendering control process processing based on the rendering control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. FIG. 8-2 and FIG. 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of the production operation of the super reach according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the "left", "middle" and "right" of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the numeral of "left" and "right" is stopped to be a reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of becoming super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is an ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 8-2 (D), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the introduction of the super reach effect (also referred to as super reach effect) is ended, such as when the introductory portion of the super reach effect ends, the super reach effect starts. While the title 31AK002 (here, the letter "SP reach A") of Super Reach A is displayed on the entire screen, a voice (here, "Super Reach A") corresponding to the title name of reach is output from the speaker 8 Thus, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the character 31AK003, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the serif 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed. The following part of the reach presentation of Super Reach A where is confronted is executed. The production in which the characters face each other is also referred to as battle production, and it becomes a big hit when the ally character wins in the battle production, and loses when the ally character loses.

  In addition, when displaying words on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the speech is not limited to displaying in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed in the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like as a subtitle.

(Super reach B)
In the case of becoming the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 8-2 (F), the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B covers the entire screen of the image display device 5 when a predetermined period of time elapses after the Super Reach effect is started, such as when the introduction portion of the Super Reach effect ends. (The letter "SP reach B" here) is displayed, and a sound corresponding to the title name of reach (here "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach B is It is informed. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8G, the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, and the serif 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed. The following part of the reach presentation of Super Reach B where is confronted is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach effect. By doing this, since the title can be notified after showing the introduced part of the super reach effect to the player, it is possible to enhance the effect of the title notification.

  Also, Super Reach A (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introductory part until a title is alert | reported, a super reach production | presentation is performed by a common production | presentation aspect (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is to be achieved after the start of the super reach effect, and which title is to be notified. In Super Reach A and Super Reach B, it is not limited to completely sharing the presentation mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by watching the presentation, etc. The parts may be in a common presentation mode. For example, in the introductory part of super reach A and super reach B, super reach production (for example, production which displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a mode related to a title notified thereafter You may By doing this, the rendering effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the rendering. In this manner, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the title 31 AK 007 (here, the letters “SP reach D”) of Super Reach D is displayed on a part of the center of the image display device 5 At the same time, as the voice corresponding to the reach title name (here, “kill the enemy”) is output from the speaker 8, the title of the super reach D is notified. As described above, in Super Reach D, a title is notified at the start of Super Reach production. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree indication 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but it does not have to completely match with the big hit reliability of the reach.

  In addition, the alerting | reporting by the audio | voice of super reach D is not alert | reporting a title name as it is, but the content of reach is alert | reported. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is made different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification form of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (I). At this time, the title 31 AK 007 and the expectation degree indication 31 AK 008 continue to be displayed by being reduced in the upper right portion or the like of the image display device 5. By doing this, the player can grasp the expectation of the reach even during the reach effect. In addition, in FIG. 8-2 (I), although the same rendering content as FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B) is shown, super reach production only for super reach D is performed. May be

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, and the serif 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted. To be executed.

(Super reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 (here, the letters "SP reach E") of Super Reach E is displayed on a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, notification of a title by voice is not performed. Also, in conjunction with the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 which is the enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is To be executed. As described above, in the Super Reach E, a title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of the super reach E having a low hit probability, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive sense of expectation to the player by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach effects of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title notification is performed (FIGS. 8-2 (D), (F)). , (H)). By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the super reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the case of super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of the super reach with a high hit probability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach reach production with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title will be announced at the start. By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have high jackpot reliability, a title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach, which have low jackpot reliability, In E, the title was notified at the start of the Super Reach production, but in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of Super Reach production, and in the case of a reach with low jackpot reliability The title may be notified after a predetermined period of time has passed after the reach effect.

(Display area of title)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is The title is notified in a part (second area) of the screen of. By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a large hit reliability, since title notification is performed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability, effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the screen, or the title is displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display area for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

  The method of varying the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be optionally changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit probability, title notification may be performed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low degree of reliability. Further, in the case where the display area to be notified of the title is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the place to be displayed may be made different.

(Expected degree indication indication)
In this embodiment, super reach A and super reach B with high hit reliability do not display anticipation indication in the title notification in super reach A and super reach D with lower hit reliability than super reach A and super reach B. In the title notification in, the expectation indication was displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the effects from being disturbed. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E whose jackpot reliability is lower than Super Reach D, the expectation indication is not displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying the expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in the low reliability reach. Note that the expectation indication may be displayed on at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) etc., the expectation indication is not limited to the one shown by the number of black stars, but may be made to indicate the expectation with a meter or a gauge, or the expectation may be The numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, it is possible to increase the number of stages of expectation by enabling display of a half equivalent (half) of black stars. .

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach presentation is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In addition, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a determined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach presentation. Moreover, by performing as described above, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed since it is possible to improve the rendering effect regardless of the display end timing.

  In addition, although it is abbreviate | omitted about the production | presentation operation | movement of the reach production of the super reach C here, the title alert | report according to big hit reliability and an expectation degree suggestion display may be performed, for example.

(Decided production)
After each reach effect is performed, when it is time to derive the display result (end of the variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is “big hit” is performed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is a "big hit", and a decision effect indicating that the display result is a "loss". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), the determined effect that the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), The finalized decorative design that will be a big hit combination is derived. In addition, if a display result is "loss", the image which shows that the ally character loses is displayed, and the finalized decoration pattern used as a reach loss combination is derived | led-out.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make attention to the determined effect, and it is possible to execute a clear title notification.

  In the example of the rendering operation shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the decorative symbol is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to perform variable display during the reach effect of the super reach. The way of displaying the decorative design during the reach effect may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying a character that is permanently displayed during hold display, active display, variable display or display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately hidden in order to draw attention to the reach effect during the reach effect of the super reach. It may be At that time, during low-reliability reach effects such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively expected by the reach effect with low reliability, and to be able to pay attention to the reach effect in the highly reliable reach effect.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation when the development rendering is performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is performed when the reach effect of the super reach D is being performed (the title notification of the super reach D is being performed), as shown in FIG. As shown in (B), an effect is performed such that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source is switched to the title notification of the development destination, so that it can be easily understood which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, in the case where the reach of the development destination is the reach for performing title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  In addition, the development effect is not limited to the example as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), but it may be an effect in which a crack is gradually broken on the screen, or a sandstorm (display as if it is broken) It may be displayed. With such an effect, unexpected effects can be performed. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gasse, such as an effect in which a reach is not developed, although a crack gradually enters the screen.

(Expected degree suggestive production)
In the stage operation example shown in Fig. 8-2 (H), a black star indicating the expected degree is displayed from the beginning that the expected degree indication 31AK008 indicates the expected degree, but five white stars are displayed first, and the stage is displayed. It may be made to execute an expectation degree suggestion effect which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when the title of Super Reach D is notified, expectation indication 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect is performed that fits within one of the white stars of the degree indication 31AK021. At this time, an audio "pin" indicating that the black star indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) outputted from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the degree of expectation indication 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F), the black star is highlighted as if it is illuminated. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect is finished.

  In the example shown in Figure 8-5 (A)-(F), black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation degree indication has been increased by one step. One or more may be displayed to increase the expectation by two or more. In addition, half black stars may be displayed to increase the expectation by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Also, there may be a case where the voice is not output. By doing this, the expectation degree suggestive effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. The same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation increasing at one time, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expectation increasing as it is displayed on the white star indicating the expectation degree indication. You may make it perform such an effect.

(Demonstration mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different rendering mode, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main substrate 11, the rendering based on the command is executed in a different rendering mode. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif, the sound outputted from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by the operation of the player.

  8-5 (G) to 8 (L) show an example of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 8-5A to 8F, title notification and expectation degree suggestion effects are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2 different in the effect mode from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G), the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed. At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. Moreover, the expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a rhombus.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect is performed that fits within one of the white rhombuses of the degree indication 31AK024. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pong" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the degree of expectation indication 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted as if it were illuminated. Thus, depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title, and the effect is achieved. improves.

  Although FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the rendering operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, another reach rendering (title notification, degree of expectation) is performed according to the rendering mode (state when the reach rendering is performed) The presentation mode of the suggestion effect may be varied. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is to be notified or the execution ratio of the title notification may be made different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing this, effects according to the player's preferences can be performed, and the effects of the effects can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is indicated by the number of black stars in the expectation degree indication display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect of increasing the number of black stars in a stepwise manner is performed, but the expectation degree It is also possible to execute an expectation indication effect of decreasing the number of indications suggesting a. Such an expected degree suggestive effect may be performed in addition to or in place of the expected degree suggestive effect of this embodiment.

(Other examples of developmental direction)
In the case of executing an expectation degree indication effect of increasing the display degree indicating the expectation degree of the expectation degree indication display step by step, the development effect may be performed after the display indicating the expectation degree is increased. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed not in stages but at one time. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is informed and the effect of gradually increasing black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), an image is displayed. A development effect is performed in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the characters “SP reach C”) is displayed. , And the title of Super Reach C is informed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source is switched to the title notification of the development destination, so that it can be easily understood which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, an expectation degree indication 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, it is displayed at one time. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect may be performed in which the title and the indication indicating the degree of expectation change.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as the notice effect, a title notice for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed according to a notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title, etc.). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), while the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black and the audio corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8, the title of Super Reach A is displayed. Is notified, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), a title preview is executed in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red. As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title preview is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title preview is executed. In the title preview shown in FIG. 8-7, there may be a case where the display mode (display color) of the title changes after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the staging effect of the preliminary presentation. Note that the timing at which the title is displayed other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed other than black from the start of display of the title.

  In addition, when a title advance notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, an audio according to the display mode after the change may be output. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the staging effect of the preliminary presentation. Further, the title notification by audio may be performed after the display mode (display color) of the title changes. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after change.

(Title execution timing)
It is preferable to execute notification of a title during reach at a timing other than the execution timing of a presentation (specific presentation) such as a preliminary presentation production or a development presentation in which the degree of expectation controlled to the jackpot advantageous state is improved. By doing this, when the title is notified once, an effect of improving the expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flow chart showing an example of advance notice effect determination processing for determining the presence or absence of the execution of the advance notice effect and the effect mode. The preview control effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the advance presentation effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If it is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super reach (presence or absence of the execution of the preview of the title) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "loss", the display color of the title of the super reach is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), for example. The display color of the Super Reach title changes from “Black”, “Red”, “Black” to “Red”, or “Black” to “Fruit” as shown in Fig. 8-9 (A). What changes, "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and in this order (ascending order), the big hit reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing this, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the rendering effect is improved.

  In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be "fruit pattern" . There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is performed. There may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes for the display color changing. Then, the big hit reliability may be made different according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of a super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the display period of the title is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine one of the changing timings. Then, in the case of a super reach (for example, super reach A or super reach B) in which the display period of the title is short, the number of changing timing may be one or less than the super reach in which the display period of the title is long.

  As the effect mode, when there are the normal mode and the special mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a rate different from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from that in the normal mode. As described above, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the preview of the title different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the line) of the character's serif in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After the display color of the Super Reach title is determined, the display color of the character's speech (the presence or absence of the serif announcement) in the reach effect of the Super Reach is determined (Step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, depending on whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "loss", the display color of the speech in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C). As shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), the display color of the speech in the reach production changes from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”. The big hit reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the speech. By doing this, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the speech, and the rendering effect is improved. It should be noted that, for those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. There may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes for the display color changing. Then, the big hit reliability may be made different according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the jackpot reliability may be made different depending on the combination of the presentation style of the title preview and the speech preview. For example, when the same presentation mode (display color) is included in the title preview and the speech preview, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same presentation mode is obtained. Also, the big hit reliability may be made different depending on the combination of the change timing of the presentation mode with the title preview and the speech preview. For example, when the change timing is the same, the big hit reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing this, it is possible to pay attention to the change timings of the title preview and the speech preview.

  When the effect mode includes the normal mode and the special mode, in the special mode, the display color of the speech may be determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from that in the normal mode.

  It should be noted that in place of the speech notice, a notice effect may be executed to give notice of the jackpot reliability by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided, and the big hit reliability may be different according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the speech in the reach effect or when it is determined not to be the variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31 S001; No), the execution presence or effect mode is determined for other advance effects (step AK31 S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance presentation effect determination process is ended.

  In this embodiment, in the case of the super reach, it is possible to execute the title preview and the speech preview, but in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the low reliability super reach), the title preview. And at least one of the serif announcement may be made executable. In addition, although the title preview and the speech preview have been described as being decided by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, the decision ratio is arbitrary, for example, even if the decision ratio is made different depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing this, it is possible to execute the notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of effect modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title preview and the speech preview. By doing this, the effects are diversified and the effect is enhanced. In the title preview and the speech preview, the number of playable presentation modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and type of playable production modes may be the same. By doing this, it is possible to execute a notice effect with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Effect production)
When the presentation mode of the title preview and the speech preview changes, a presentation may be performed that indicates that the presentation mode changes. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a speech may be performed. Then, after the effect presentation is performed, the presentation mode (display color) of the title or speech may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image and the like) of the action effect may be common to any of the title and words. Note that there may be cases where the presentation mode of the title or speech does not change despite the action presentation being performed. In the case of executing the effect presentation, the presence / absence of the execution of the operation presentation, the execution timing, and the presentation mode may be determined based on the determination result of the title preview and the speech preview. Such determination may be performed in the process of step AK31 S004. For example, the ratio at which at least one of the presentation mode of the title preview and the speech preview changes (the rate at which the presentation mode changes due to the function presentation) may be different according to the presentation mode of the action presentation, The ratio (the ratio of acting on which effect mode) of the serif announcement and which presentation mode changes may be different, or the ratio of what color (in which stage) changes may be different. . By executing such an operation effect, the player becomes aware of which one of the title and the speech to act when the operation effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of effect effects and effect modes may be determined at different rates according to the effect modes. By doing this, it is possible to execute the action presentation according to the presentation mode, and the presentation effect is improved.

  As another example of such effect presentation, at least one of the presentation aspect (display color) of either the title or the speech according to the presentation content of the reach presentation (for example, the action of the character, the presentation content in the battle presentation, etc.) May change. By doing this, the player pays attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic parts described in the above embodiment are not essential components, and can be appropriately omitted.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Although the term “sub-liquid crystal” is used here, the sub-display device may be configured of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub-liquid crystal, various effects such as display of preliminary effects and hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be performed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the title notification, the title or expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title in the image display device 5, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the indication of the degree of expectation. By doing this, it is possible to easily understand the title and the expectation indication which can display the title and the expectation indication without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a reach effect title as a suggested effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to title notification (information that mainly displays characters) regarding other effects. May be For example, in the case of executing pre-reading zone effect in which the background image in the image display device 5 is shifted to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) different as the pre-notice effect, for example, The present invention may be applied to the title notification of When presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Eliminate an enemy using a stick controller, etc.”), and execute a mission effect that will be in the player's favor when the mission is achieved. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modified Example 1 of Feature 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is a “big hit” is performed, and then the display result is displayed ( Fig. 8-3 (B) to (D). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for urging the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected in the operation valid period. The display result may be indicated by displaying the outcome of the battle effect or by temporarily stopping the display result. By doing this, since the display result is indicated according to the operation of the player, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, and the interest is improved.

  FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the super reach in the modified example in which the operation effect is executed and the display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the character 31AK041, which is an ally character, and the character that is an enemy character 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11 (G) to (I), reach effects in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 face each other are executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), the small button image 31AK043 and the restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Thus, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that operation effects are to be executed are prepared. And big hit reliability differs according to which operation production image is displayed and operation production is performed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is performed during the reach effect may be changed to a more reliable aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to a pleased character 31AK046 and the small button image 31AK043 The image changes to a large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which the bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits on is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modification, an operation effect indicating that the operation effect image changes when the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the operation effect is performed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may be different depending on the type of action effect.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), the control line 31AK 044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J) before the display result is derived, and as shown in FIG. Is displayed on the screen, prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A. At this time, the operation to the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L), an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed. Thereafter, at the end of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a finalized decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. In addition, when operation is not detected within the operation effective period defined beforehand, the image shown to FIGS. 8-11 (L) will be displayed automatically.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image The jackpot confidence is high. Even when the operation effect image with a low degree of reliability is displayed, the operation effect image with a high degree of reliability may be changed during the reach effect, so the effect of presentation is improved, and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  In addition, in the rendering operation example shown in FIG. 8-10 and FIG. 8-11, the notification of the reach title and the indication indicating the degree of expectation are omitted, but the reach effect shown in FIG. 8-10 and FIG. 8-11 It may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (presence or absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence or absence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG.

(Modified Example 2 of Feature 31AK)
A suggestion display may be made to indicate the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state. For example, the shutter effect that performs the first indication display and the reach title effect that performs the second indication display may be performed. In the shutter effect, after the start of variable display, an effect of covering the screen with shutter display is performed. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title preview of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined in another process.

  The specific image is an image of high hit reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In any of the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. In addition, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect execution, when the display is performed with the fruit pattern image, the big hit reliability is higher than the time when the display is not performed with the fruit pattern image. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including each of the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, the pattern of images other than a fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image which shows big hit reliability when shutter production and reach title production are performed. For example, white images <blue images <red images <fruit pattern images may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter, a reach title of red characters, etc.). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

  When performing a shutter display and a reach title display, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, notification that the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. The light emission control of the common sound and the game effect lamp 9 indicates to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. In performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification on the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIGS. 8-12 are display screen diagrams when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are performed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display in the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all of the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, at the time of the shutter effect execution, the notification to output the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the shutter that has been closed is opened, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b), variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The downward arrow indicates the variable display of the left, middle and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (c), the reach state is established.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. For example, the variable display is displayed small at the upper right of the screen and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of super reach to be executed from now on are displayed as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, characters of "battle reach" indicating that reach effect with battle effect is to be executed are displayed.

  Further, at the time of the reach title effect execution, the notification to output the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after the common sound is output, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Tsui Tsui”. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the indication to be displayed is smaller than that of the shutter effect. However, as described above, in the reach title effect, the player can easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed by outputting the specific sound. Although the case where the output period is completely divided has been described for the common sound and the specific sound, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "battle won!" Is displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit was decided by having won the battle. When the battle effect is over, it returns to the variable display screen by the original number symbol. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped, and the big hit symbol of "777" is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d), all of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this manner, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a fruit pattern image with a high hit probability has been displayed.

  Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. In this way, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from being obscured by overlapping execution timings.

  The determination (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) relating to the shutter effect may be performed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG. 8-8. At that time, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31 AKS 002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily performed. Further, the determination of the reach title effect may be performed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the determination of the shutter effect.

[Description of Feature 21TM]
Next, the feature portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted with various control boards, such as a main board 11, a presentation control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9A, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various substrates such as, for example, a payout control substrate, a launch control substrate, and an interface substrate are disposed on the back of the gaming board 2 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, etc. are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state housed in the board case 21TM 201 as shown in FIG. Various circuits for control are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control substrate consisting of a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch disposed at a predetermined position, etc. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special figure or the second special figure Of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 It also has a function to control.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided. , Also has a function to display various winning information about the winning. A display selector switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by the operation of the display selector switch 21TM030.

  In addition to detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls, the main substrate 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, a reset signal, etc. A switch circuit 110 for transmission to 100, and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the terminal substrate 21TM016 are mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 and FIG. 9-5 (A), the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the main substrate A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is disposed at the center of 11 and a display switching switch 21TM030 is disposed on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display switching switch 21TM030 are disposed on the front when the main substrate 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the back surface of the main substrate 11. The main board 11 can not be viewed in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, so the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is the front at the time of visual recognition, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front of the main substrate 11 may be shared with the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the main substrate 11 is viewed.

  In addition, the main substrate 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, and so on, "the entry area" The number of game balls entering the game is counted, and various winning information such as consecutive ratio and winning ratio by the counting are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information are displayed. In this way, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as a winning ratio and a winning ratio after being installed in the game arcade. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the game board surface (pass the test) so that the game balls enter the general winning opening with a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed at a predetermined frequency whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been installed, it is confirmed as to what adjustments have been made and, as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening with a frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize in the pachinko gaming machine 1 what adjustment has been made after installation.

  Further, the power supply substrate is enclosed in a substrate case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a setting value such as a jackpot probability (out-dropping rate) described later is changed in the lower right of the back surface of the power supply substrate. A clear switch (setting change-over switch) 21TM052 which functions as a setting switch for the purpose and a power supply switch 21TM055 are provided. The store clerk or the like in the game arcade operates the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereby predetermined substrates such as the main substrate 11, effect control substrate 12 and payout control substrate 21TM037 are provided. Operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, when the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the gaming control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. To be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in proximity to each other on the same power supply substrate, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be facilitated.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can not be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the store clerk who holds the predetermined key can operate. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, among the store clerks in the game arcade, only the store clerk who holds the key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of performing the switching operation of ON and OFF by a predetermined key, but performs an operation (for example, a pressing operation) which is capable of executing the switching operation and different from the switching operation. It may be a possible switch.

  The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is configured such that the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk or the like at the game arcade must turn the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state in order to recover the key, so the clerk at the game arcade or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. Can be prevented.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won in each winning opening and the gaming balls that have entered into the out port are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and in the nozzle, a discharge port switch 21TM 070 for detecting the game balls discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting the fired game balls) is provided ing. The outlet switch 21TM 070 is connected to the aforementioned switch circuit 110 as shown in FIG.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 And an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

  FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to the dispensing, such as the dispensing control board 21TM037 and the ball dispensing apparatus 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9B, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and incorporates at least a RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control CPU 21TM371, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having the RAM and the ROM, and the I / O port. Also, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the dispensed piece count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 through the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, after the detection signal from the dispensing number counting switch 21TM301 is input to the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370, it is output to the main substrate 11 through the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9B, the payout control board 21TM 037 can open and close the front of the game board 2 with a game machine frame open sensor that detects the opening of the game machine frame 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 as shown in FIG. The game machine frame and door frame open sensor 21TM300 including the door frame open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a that is covered by the camera is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). Note that the detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 can distinguish and recognize the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

  Further, a detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is inputted to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control substrate 21TM037 through the relay substrate 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor with a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that the gaming ball is clogged, that is, a so-called ball bite. . In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 21TM187 indicates the out-of-ball state, and the detection signal from the full-tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full-tank state And stop the ball payout process.

  Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the low level to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the striking device. Output a full signal. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch substrate 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch substrate 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch substrate 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094) The signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply substrate, is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals in serial communication with the gaming control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 through the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to confirm, signals (a winning ball request signal, a reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at a fixed interval (for example, one second). That is, microcomputer 100 for game control transmits a signal (a winning ball request signal in this embodiment) for performing connection confirmation at fixed intervals via serial communication circuit 21TM 505, and microcomputer 21TM 370 for payout control. When the game ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100 is received, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are transmitted and received at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal by putting specific data on the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with each other. For example, when a winning occurs, the gaming control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by making a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal different, and the prize for which the setting is made is made. The ball request signal is sent to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the data indicating the end of the winning balls by changing the predetermined bits of the receiving ACK signal when the winning ball paying out operation is finished, and the receiving ACK signal in which the setting is made is played It transmits to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball rental, full tank, ball breakage, etc.) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by making a predetermined bit of the reception ACK signal different, and the setting The received reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Further, specific signal exchange by serial communication in the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9-22 and FIGS.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the output port 21TM372b to display a winning ball information signal indicating the number of winning balls and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of rental balls as terminal boards (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board And (e.g.) 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 9-2.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the LED 21TM374 for error display by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Furthermore, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to the award ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from an error release switch 21TM 375 for releasing an error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM 375 is used to release an error state by software reset.

  Further, the drive signal to the dispensing motor 21TM289 from the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted to the dispensing motor 21TM289 in the dispensing mechanism portion of the ball dispensing device 21TM097 through the output port 21TM372a and the relay substrate 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on a card unit 21TM 050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM 050 is provided with an availability indicator lamp, a coupling table direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp and a card slot. Connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066 are a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball rental available LED 21TM061, a ball rental switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063.

  From the interface substrate 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 is operated are given according to the operation of the player . In addition, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a sphere lendable display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. A connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball rental request signal (BRQ signal), a ball rental completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal (card signal) between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. The PRDY signal is transmitted and received through the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface substrate 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control substrate 21TM037. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9B, signals such as connection signals (VL signals) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control substrate 21TM037 through the interface substrate 21TM066.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. In addition, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connection state / non-connection state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input a ball lending switch signal, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to make the predetermined number of rental balls for the player. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. Thereafter, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM 050 is not in the on state, when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the award ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC 24 V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power supply from the power supply substrate to the card unit 21TM 050 is performed via the payout control substrate 21TM 037 and the interface substrate 21TM 066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided on the AC 24 V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 disposed in the interface substrate 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to change the jackpot probability (out-rolling rate) in accordance with the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (wining probability) according to the setting value, the winning probability of winning a jackpot (dispensing rate) is changed . The set value is composed of six steps of 1 to 6, and the highest dropout rate is 6 and the lower the dropout rate, the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 becomes. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the degree of advantage is the highest for the player, and as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the degree of advantage decreases in stages.

  FIGS. 9A to 9F are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the respective setting values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR 1 is set. In each display result judgment table, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is a target of fluctuation indication, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a judgment value to be a big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of variation display If the set value is “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, the jackpot wins with a probability (1/300) lower than in the case of “2”, “3”, “5”, and “6”. ing. Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even when the target of the variable display is selected, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display table for variation of a drawing corresponding to setting value 2 is used, the setting value is “1” when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first. It is designed to win a big hit with a higher probability (1/280) than in certain cases. Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even when the target of the variable display is selected, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, It is designed to win a big hit with a probability (1/280) higher than the case of "2". Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even when the target of the variable display is selected, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9D, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is to be won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even when the target of the variable display is selected, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the display table for variation of a drawing corresponding to the setting value 5 is used, the setting value is “1” when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, The jackpot is won with a probability (1/235) higher than in the case of "2", "3" and "4". Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even when the target of the variable display is selected, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, In the case of "2", "3", "4" and "5", the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220). Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even when the target of the variable display is selected, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). If it agrees with the hit judgment value, it decides to make a big hit (big hit A to big hit F) for the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. In addition, "probability" shown to FIGS. 9-4 (A)-(F) shows the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. In addition, to decide whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). Separately provided, the determination of the big hit is made using the common table in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special design designation buffer It is also good.

  In the present embodiment, a total of six setting values of 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The setting value that can be set to may be two, three, four, five, or seven or more.

  Here, the counting of the game balls and the display of the feature ratio etc. on the main substrate 11 of this embodiment will be described.

  The main board 11 has information on game winnings, for example, the number of winning balls by winning in the first start winning opening (Hezo), the number of winning balls by winning in the second start winning opening (electric chew), the big winning opening The number of winning balls by winning in (the attacker) and the total number of winning balls are input, and the number of firing balls is counted, and the display monitor 21TM 029 has the number of winning balls by winning in the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The ratio of the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric Chu) and the number of winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) in the total number of winning balls A certain part ratio (%) and a base (%) which is a ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls hit are displayed. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls (following winning feature balls obtained by winning) to the large winning opening (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination is the number of winning balls from the second starting winning opening (electric chew) in the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls from the winning on the large winning opening (attacker) (number of balls for winning the following items) Is the proportion of The base is the ratio of the number of game balls played to the total number of balls. The total number of winning balls (total winning ball number below) is the number of winning balls by winning in the big winning opening (attacker), the number of winning balls by winning in the second start winning opening (electric chew), and the big winning opening (Attacker) and the number of prize balls by the winnings to the winning opening (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the second starting winning opening (electric chew). Note that the special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable features, and by the variation of the passable width of the gaming ball, the winning probability ratio of the gaming ball fluctuates. is there. In addition, the winning opening (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) is a fixed winning combination, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected winning percentage of the game ball is a fixed feature.

  As a tabulation and calculation method of information on winnings in a game, the winning ratio and winning ratio are determined by winning a first start winning opening (Heso) and a general winning opening (Sode) with 6000 winning balls. The number (general award ball number), the number of prize balls by winning in the second start winning hole (electric chew), the number of the ordinary electric circuit prize balls (electric chew ball number), and the winning in the big prize hole (attacker) The special electric circuit winning ball number (attacker winning ball number), which is the number of winning balls, is counted. The total is regarded as one set, and 10 sets, that is, a ratio (%) for 60000, and a ratio (%) are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize ball number) by winning in the first starting winning opening (Heso) and general winning hole (Sode) to be counted, the number of regular electric circuit prize balls (electric chew prize ball number), special electric The award winning ball number (attacker winning ball number) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set ing. That is, a considerable number (for example, several bytes) of storage for 11 sets of 6,000 sets is stored, and it is possible to calculate a running ratio (%) and a playing ratio (%) of their totals. In addition, with regard to the base, the number of game balls hit against the number of 60000 winning balls is counted. The count is regarded as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60000 winning balls to the number of game balls hit is calculated.

  The display monitor 21TM029 is a base calculated on the basis of a continuous ratio (%), a duty ratio (%), and a cumulative ratio (%), a duty ratio (%), and a previous 60000 winning balls The base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the base 1 (%) and the last 60000 winning balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). That is, the six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display everything, but the number of winning balls by winning on the first starting winning opening (Heso) counted up as the game progresses, to the second starting winning opening (electric chew) The number of winning balls by winning and the number of winning balls by winning at the big winning mouth (attacker) will change. If, for example, the number of winning balls won after displaying a ratio of 6,000 (%) is reflected in the ratio of 0000 (%) displayed after that, 6,000 will be displayed. Discrepancies may occur between the continuous ratio (%) and the duty ratio (%) of 60000. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning in the first start winning hole (heso), the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting prize hole (electric chew), the number of prize balls by winning in the large winning hole (attacker), prize balls Such a discrepancy can be prevented if the total number is input and tabulated at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of a continuous ratio (%) for 6,000 pieces, etc.).

  In addition, the storage area in which the information on the winning of the game in the present embodiment is stored is provided for each setting value, and the general winning prize ball, the first starting winning prize ball, the regular electric winning ball, the special electric combination The winning balls, the winning ball totals, and the hit totals are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) according to the set values set. For this reason, it is possible to separately calculate each combination value, combination ratio, and base of the present embodiment for each set value.

  As an example of calculation method below, the total number of winning balls is 60000, and the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric Chu) and winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) The method of calculating the item ratio (combination ratio (%)) in the case where the character acquisition ball number which is the total is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total winning ball number means the total cumulative number of gaming media (winning balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the prize winning ball number refers to the total number of game media paid out by the game media winning in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the continuous winning thing winning ball number refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out by the game media winning the attacker. The total hit number refers to the total number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of winning balls reaches 60000. Therefore, the coupling ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the duty ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). Further, the base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Reciprocal ratio = [continuous character acquisition ball number / total acquisition number] x 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(continuous character acquisition ball number + character acquisition ball number) / total acquisition number] × 100 ... (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of winning balls) / total hit number] × 100 (3)

  When the total number of winning balls is 60000 and the number of obtained balls is 42000, the character ratio is obtained as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point) by dividing 42000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 can not perform the calculation below the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of balls obtained by the bonus is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4.200000. And this 4200000 is divided by 60000. This gives 70 as the quotient. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is calculated as 70%. In other words, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, in order to obtain an operation result up to three decimal places, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of winning balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. And divide 42000 by 600. This gives 70 as the quotient. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, calculation results up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, in order to obtain an operation result up to three decimal places, division by 1000 may be performed.

  Although the total number of winning balls is 60000 in the above-described example, a 3-byte area is provided as a region for storing the total number of winning balls in order to calculate the feature ratio of a long period. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA 60h in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A 410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the bonus item acquisition ball number as well.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only calculate values of up to 2 bytes. Thus, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method will be described in which the second calculation method is simplified. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded off with respect to 00EA 60h of the total number of prize balls so that calculation with the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is discarded, and the character acquisition ball number 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation is calculated.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. Based on 78 determined here, the character ratio is determined as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, while the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error is + 1% when the total number of winning balls and the number of obtained balls are 10 times. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the feature ratio is extended, and approximates to the original value.

Further, the substrate case 21TM201 is formed of a translucent material, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 can be viewed. The substrate case 21TM 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main substrate 11 is inserted and a heat radiation hole for releasing the heat of the electrical component of the main substrate 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main substrate 11 is disposed at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is not blocked by the heat radiation holes. Here, “directly on the front” means directly on the main substrate 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the employee or the like who is trying to visually recognize the main substrate 11 and the main substrate 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only calculate values of up to 2 bytes. Thus, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method will be described in which the second calculation method is simplified. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded off with respect to 00EA 60h of the total number of prize balls so that calculation with the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is discarded, and the character acquisition ball number 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation is calculated.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. Based on 78 determined here, the character ratio is determined as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area where information on game winnings is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (sum of information on game winnings stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters of maximum 2 bytes), prize balls The total number buffer is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be stored continuously. The ring buffer will be further described later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the bonus ball acquisition ball number is larger than the stored value of the total ball number, or the character Initialization of the storage area where information on winning of the game is stored when an event that can not occur as a situation is detected, for example, when the value of the continuous winning object winning ball number is larger than the value of the winning ball number You may process. In addition, an error display or a warning display may be performed without performing the initialization processing, or the error processing or the warning display may be performed, or the initialization processing may be performed after the error display or the warning display. The error display and the warning display will be further described later.

  In the calculation of the duty ratio (%), for example, assuming that the total number of obtained balls is 34,321 and the number of obtained balls is 19876, the ratio is calculated by dividing 34,321 against 19876 as a divisor. 19876/34321 = 0.57912 and so on, which is calculated to be about 57.9% of the part ratio (%). In the case of performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculation with the decimal point must be avoided, so the following calculation formula is used. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34,321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded off, resulting in 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the decimal part is rounded off, it is calculated to be 57% of the part ratio (%) and displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, the value calculated by the correct calculation is an error on the display There will be no

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the largest error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of obtained objects are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when converted to the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, there is an error of + 0.3% at 32799/327 = 100.3%. For example, when the decimal point is rounded down and the calculation is performed, the correct value is 69.9%, and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%. Although an error of% is considered to be displayed, the ratio (%) (or a ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error also on the display of an error of 1%.

  Further, in the case of using the above calculation method, since the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, the calculation can not be performed when the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Furthermore, the error is gradually increased when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in an even larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error. For this reason, the display ratio (%) and the link ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired spheres (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by a counter. Even if the display is performed, it may be notified that there is a possibility that the error may be large, by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, blinking the displayed value, or the like.

  In addition, the display monitor 21TM029 displays the ratio (%), the ratio (%), and the base (%) on seven segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). Display. In this case, for example, while displaying a part ratio (%) for 5 seconds, a phenomenon occurs that a game medium is newly awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the ratio calculated according to it is repeated ratio after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as the value of%), there is a possibility that the value of the part ratio (%) and the value of the continuous part (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable to sequentially display values calculated and calculated within the same interrupt as the duty ratio (%) and the coupling ratio (%).

  Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when 2 segments are provided), the display can not be made 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 9-5A, although it is possible to display numerical values in the lower two digits, even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under specific conditions, numerical values may be displayed in part of the upper two digits.

  In this embodiment, the sensors provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that the game medium has won, and the number of winning balls is individually counted based on the detection result. The present invention is not limited to this, and uses a sensor provided after the merging of discharge channels through which the gaming media winning the attacker and the gaming media winning the electric cho are merged, and the detection result is It is also possible to count the feature acquisition ball number and the continuous feature acquisition ball number based on the above.

  Hereinafter, the display of the ratio, the duty ratio, and the base will be described more specifically. In the present embodiment, the main substrate 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 9-3). On the back side of the game board 2, besides the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided.

  The RAM 102 in the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, a fourth A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. Although the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the number of winnings of the big winning opening (attacker) is counted by the large winning number counter, the present invention is not limited to this, and these first big winnings The first large winning number counter for counting the number of winnings to the mouth and the second large winning number counter for counting the number of winnings for the second large winning opening are separately provided, and the number of winnings for the first large winning opening And the number of winnings on the second big winning opening may be individually counted, and the number of winnings may be summed to obtain the number of winnings for the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first starting winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. The second starting winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second starting opening switch 22B. The first general winning number counter to the fourth general winning number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch. The large winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of the game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply substrate shown in FIG. 9-3. The clear switch 21TM052 is disposed on the back side of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like can not easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, the data used for the ratio and the duty ratio stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when the calculation of the ratio or the ratio can not be reperformed, such as when there is a failure in the calculation of the ratio or the ratio 21TM052. For this reason, it is a switch which does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal coupling ratio and a combination ratio. When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to the data clear.

  As described above, the RTC 106 is provided on the main substrate 11, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by performing initial setting, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the operating time of the game arcade.

  The main substrate 11 is accommodated in the substrate case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A). The caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the substrate case 21TM201. By providing the caulking pins 21TM011B, the main substrate 11 is completely sealed in the substrate case 21TM201, so that tampering with the main substrate 11 is prevented. The substrate case 21TM 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”).

  Further, the display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main substrate 11. In addition, a sealing seal 21TM011S is attached to the substrate case 21TM201 for proving that the main substrate 11 is sealed. The sealing seal 21TM011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing seal 21TM011S is disposed at a position away from the main substrate 11, and is disposed at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is interrupted, such as the front of the display monitor 21TM029. Thus, the display monitor 21TM029 is disposed at a position not hidden by the sealing seal 21TM011S.

  The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D, and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. Each of the first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E is configured of seven segments each including seven segments that draw the character of "8" and dots arranged at the lower right of the seven segments. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, and white. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in an extremely short cycle.

  The items of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 9-5B are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. RAM clear notification (“C”) to notify that the first display unit 21TM029A in the first digit has accumulated setting values (1 to 6) and that RAM clearing executed by the CPU 103 after processing of the setting change mode is completed Is displayed, and the second display unit 21TM029B for the second digit and the third display unit 21TM029C for the third digit display the aggregation period, and the fourth display unit 21TM029D for the fourth digit and the fifth display unit for the fifth digit In 21TM029E, numerical values are displayed as percentages. In the display No. 1, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the short-term duty ratio is displayed. In display No. 3, the total ratio of cumulative totals is displayed, and in display No. 4, the ratio of total cumulative totals is displayed. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 winning balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately previous 60000 winning balls is displayed Be done.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6,000. The period for which the total cumulative total is determined means a total period after starting calculation of the ratio, combination ratio, or total ratio after resetting the calculation of the combination ratio or ratio once.

  In the above-mentioned example, although a continuation ratio, a part ratio, and a base are calculated irrespective of a game state, you may calculate in consideration of a game state. For example, the ratio may be a ratio of the number of winning balls by winning to the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state in the total number of winning balls. In addition, as the ratio of winning balls by winning to the second starting winning opening during high base state and winning balls by winning to big winning opening during the big hit gaming state among the winning balls total number It is also good. Also, the bases may be separately calculated in the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, when the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the fourth display section 21TM029D and the fifth display section 21TM029E display the short-term continuous ratio in percentage (% display), and the short-term part ratio of display No. 2 is displayed In the case of being displayed, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the short-term winning ratio in percentage (in%).

  When the total cumulative linkage ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total display link ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) in the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display section 21TM029E. In the case where the ratio is displayed, the total display combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C when Base 1 of Display No. 5 is displayed, and the second display unit is displayed when Base 2 of Display No. 4 is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, when the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total display continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, the total cumulative duty ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display).

  The main substrate 11 enters the fourth general winning opening from the special winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening when calculating the ratio, combination and base. The number of entered game balls and the number of game balls discharged from the outlet are counted. In the main processing, the CPU 103 controls the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, the discharge opening switch 21TM070. A switch process is performed to confirm the state of each switch (presence or absence of detection signal).

  In this switch process, it is specified to which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When the detection signal is output from the second general winning opening switch, the third general winning opening switch, the fourth general winning opening switch, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, the third general winning number Each entry area is added by adding the value of the counter and the 4th general winning number counter and adding the value of the hit number counter when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM 070 Aggregate of entering the number of game balls (the winning number of game balls to each of the winning openings). The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  As described above, the steps for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area are executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing). By including it in the switch process, it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without executing a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the execution program. It has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main substrate 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning on each winning opening based on the counted number of gaming balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let The number of winning balls by the winning of the gaming balls is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls paid out by one winning for the winning opening and the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of winning balls by the winning of the gaming balls is predetermined for each winning opening.

  The number of winning balls per winning opening classified here is, as shown in FIG. 9-6, the winning balls from the general winning opening winning balls (first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening (Sode). ), 1st start winning prize winning ball (prising ball by winning in the first starting winning hole (heso)), regular electric pole winning ball (prising ball by winning in electric chew), special electric pole winning ball (to attackers) The number of prize balls by the prize ball). In addition, the RAM 102 also stores the total number of winning balls and the number of game balls hit. In addition, in CPU103, although the number of game ball prizes to the general prize hole and the number of game ball prizes to the first start prize hole are separately counted, the number of game ball prizes to the general prize hole and the first start The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be collectively collected. In addition, although the number of prize balls for the general winning prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first starting winning ball are calculated separately, the number of winning balls for the general winning mouth ball and the number of the first starting winning pit The number of winning balls and the number of winning balls may be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer is provided with ten first to tenth storage areas consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter storing the number of prize balls obtained by winning into each winning opening for every 6,000 number of prize balls. Thus, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer is provided with a 0-th storage area consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter storing the number of winning balls by winning on each winning opening for every 6,000 winning balls. The number of winning balls for each winning opening, which increases with the progress of the game, is added to the zeroth storage area. Eleven storage areas of the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store data of 256 × 256 = 65536, and up to 6000 data can be stored with room.

  In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with storage areas for the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total sum for each winning opening. There is. The storage area for 10 sets of totals and total totals is configured with a maximum of 3 bytes of counter, so it can store 256 x 256 x 256 = 16777216 data, and up to 60000 pieces of data have a margin. It can be stored.

  Also, in the RAM 102, a continuous ratio storage area for storing 10 combinations and total cumulative ratio and combination ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2) and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1) And a base storage area for storing The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and combination ratio of 10 sets and total cumulative total by the number of winning balls based on the number of winning game balls to 10 sets and total cumulative total winning openings, 10 sets equivalent And storing the combination ratio of the total accumulation and the combination ratio in a combination ratio storage area. The combination ratio storage area storing 10 combinations and the total cumulative combination ratio and combination ratio are each configured by a maximum of 1 byte counter. For example, in the case of storing the ratio and combination of 10 sets and the total total as integers, they can be stored with a maximum of 1-byte counter with a margin.

  Further, the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11 calculates a base for 10 sets by the number of hits for the number of game balls paid to each winning opening for 10 sets, and the base for 10 sets (base 2) The base storage area stores a base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits for the number of game balls awarded to each winning opening for 10 sets of. For example, when storing base 1 and base 2 in integers, they can be stored with a maximum of 1 byte counter with allowance.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. 9-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in register, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 9-7, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H represents a hexadecimal number. Hereinafter, Of the same, 0000H to 2FBFH (2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 103 specifies this ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101. Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas of the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and registers to the register through this register area. Write data.

  Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is allocated to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 and to the RAM 102. Write data. Note that other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC 0H to FFFFH) are non-use areas.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the RAM area (in the present embodiment, 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 is a RAM control area, a nonuse area, a RAM data area, and other areas. It consists of The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area includes instruction data (op code) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplemental data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. Data for the configured control program (sometimes referred to simply as control program data) is temporarily stored, and in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area, reference data referred to by the above control program (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) are temporarily stored.

  Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data used for displaying the coupling ratio and the duty ratio is temporarily stored. For example, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area, a storage area for storing the total cumulative total of the number of winning balls for each winning opening and a continuous ratio combination storage area for the total total are provided. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of winning balls per winning opening (10 sets A storage area for the sum of minutes) and a continuous ratio storage area for 10 sets are provided. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data in which the start addresses of the subroutines are different from each other is stored.

  In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each data described above (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) If the management data) is data of a byte number (for example, 2 bytes) exceeding 1 byte, the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. doing.

  Further, the main substrate 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the ratio, the duty ratio, and the base. Here, the main substrate 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. 9-9 (A) is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a character ratio display apparatus. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, first, the short-term link ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the short-term continuous ratio display of Display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1), “1” which is the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the third display portion 21TM029C displays the character "6." In addition, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display a short-term contingent ratio. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display No. 1 is continued for 5 seconds, the short-term winning ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-2), in the display of the short-term part ratio of display No. 2, “1” which is the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the third display unit 21TM029C displays the character "7." In addition, a short-term winning ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term winning ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  If the display of display No 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative link ratio of display No 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-3), “1”, which is the set value, is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A and the second display unit 21TM029B displays “A” as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-3). The character of “6.” is displayed on the third display portion 21TM029C. In addition, the total cumulative link ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative link ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  If the display No. 3 is continued for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative duty ratio of display No 4 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-4), “1”, which is the set value, is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and the second display section 21TM029B displays “A The character of “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the gross cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character of "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character of "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No 4 continues for 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5), the base 1 of display No 5 is displayed. The display of base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of base 1 of display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5), “1” which is the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the character "L." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, the base 1 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No 5 continues for 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6), the base 2 of the display No 6 is displayed. The display of base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6), “1” which is a set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E
The base 2 calculated based on the last 60000 winning balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display No. 5 is continued for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 is sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. Further, as the color of the display, only the short-term link ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination of display No. 2 to base 2 of display No. 5 is red. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 switches and displays the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation continuous ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18A to FIG. 18B, the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation combination ratio, the total-cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is display switch 21TM030. Based on the operation of, the short-term connection ratio when the setting value is "1", the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation continuous ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1, the display of the base 2, the setting value is "2" Short-term ratio, short-term ratio, total-cum-ratio, total-cum-ratio, base 1, display of base 2, short-term ratio for the setting value “3”, short-term combination, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative It is possible to sequentially change the display of the duty ratio, the base 1 and the base 2. When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “1”, 1) The numerical value displayed on the display portion 21TM029A is updated to “2”, and the short-term run ratio, the short-term part ratio, the total cumulative run ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E The numerical values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "2".

  In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “2”, 1) The numerical value displayed on the display portion 21TM029A is updated to “3”, and the short-term run ratio, the short-term part ratio, the total cumulative run ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E The numerical values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “3”.

  In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “3”, 1) The numerical value displayed on the display portion 21TM029A is updated to “4”, and the short-term run ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative run ratio, and the total-cumulative combination displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The numerical values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “4”.

  In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation continuous ratio, the total-accumulation ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “4”, 1) The numerical value displayed on the display portion 21TM029A is updated to “5”, and the short-term run ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative run ratio, and the total-cumulative combination displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "5".

  In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “5”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display portion 21TM029A is updated to "6", and the short-term run ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative run ratio, and the total-cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "6".

  Then, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation continuous ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “6”, 1) The numerical value displayed on the display portion 21TM029A is updated to “1”, and the short-term run ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative run ratio, and the total-cumulative combination displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The numerical values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “1”.

  In addition, in the display monitor 21TM029 of this embodiment, although a form capable of displaying a ratio, a duty ratio, and a base at each set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 In the above, it may be possible to display only one numerical value or any two numerical values out of these ratio, part ratio, and base.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which a ratio, a part ratio, and a base, which are information based on the number of award balls, are calculated, and the ratio, the part ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 may display the history of the number of awarded balls without calculating the ratio, the duty ratio, or the base. .

  In the present embodiment, only the short-term connection ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 21TM029, and the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term ratio and the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio and the total cumulative ratio are indicated in the same color, and the base 1 and the base 2 are short-term ratio, short-term It may be displayed in the same color different from the combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative ratio.

  In the main substrate 11, when the total prize sphere of the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the storage of the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage of the storage area of the sum total and the total accumulation for 10 sets, the combination ratio storage area storing the combination ratio of 10 sets and the total accumulation, and the transmission ratio is respectively updated.

  In updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the zeroth storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. In addition, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10, the number of prize balls of the general prize winning prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is “27” “81” “120” “36” “225” “87” respectively. Suppose that it is "66" "117" "45" "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6,000, the number of prize balls of the general prize winning prize balls in the 1st to 10th storage areas is “27”, “81” “ Update to "120" "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21". Further, the number of winning balls in the 0 th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of winning balls in the 10 th storage area is erased.

  When the number of winning balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the stored number of winning balls may be once erased and then a new number of winning balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new winning number may be stored by overwriting the stored winning number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes the security check process which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid or not, and then the game control main after step S21TM1010 Start processing In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, weight is performed until the effect control board 12 starts operation (step S21TM1040).

  Then, the CPU 103 performs initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), etc. (step S21TM1050), and then the RAM 102 is executed. The accessible state is set (step S21TM1060). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-12, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (step S21TM1110). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs an output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

  When the ON state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. . That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Control the processing state to the setting change mode based on the

  The CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from the information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal in response to transition to the setting change mode (step S21TM1130). Thereby, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages game information of each gaming machine, the setting change of the gaming machine which is the output source of these signals is performed based on the fact that the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are input. It is possible to specify that the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, in the display device included in the external device, it is possible to specify the gaming machine (for example, the machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command specifying that control in the setting change mode has been performed as a production control command to the production control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode in the image display device 5.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display it (step S21TM1150). Then, the operation of the clear switch (setting selection switch) 21TM052 is on standby (step S21TM1160), and the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 is on standby (step S21TM1180).

  In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 every time the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160) And (step S21TM1170). For example, as described later, every time a setting change operation is received, display control is performed in which the displayed set value is increased by one and returned to 1 after reaching 6.

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 while waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed (step S21TM1190). That is, the setting value is determined by overwriting the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 with the displayed setting value. Then, the determined set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

  In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is not operated (without being determined as YES in step S21TM1160), the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF (YES in step S21TM1180). If it is determined that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the setting value storage of the RAM 102 is stored as a result. The setting values stored in the area are not changed.

  When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to an initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 described later.

  When the OFF state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM1120 described above (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 performs setting capable of confirming the setting value. Move to confirmation mode. That is, although the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on is satisfied, the second condition that the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is ON is not satisfied when the power is turned on. Control the processing state to the setting confirmation mode based on the

  The CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from the information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal in response to transition to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210). Thereby, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages game information of each gaming machine, the setting change of the gaming machine which is the output source of these signals is performed based on the fact that the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are input. It can be specified that the mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, in the display device included in the external device, it is possible to specify the gaming machine (for example, the machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits, as an effect control command for the effect control board 12, a setting confirmation mode command for specifying that the control is performed in the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode in the image display device 5.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display it (step S21TM1230). Then, it waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1240).

  When the CPU 103 detects that the lock switch 21TM051 is off (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode is ended, and the CPU 103 returns to FIG. The process then proceeds to a process of determining whether or not the power failure detection process has been executed in step S21TM1320 shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S21TM1110 described above that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 is a clear switch input through the input port as shown in FIG. 9-13. (Setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply substrate) The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the 21TM 052 is confirmed (step S21TM 1310).

  When the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not checked (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes the power-off detection process (see FIG. 9-14). It is determined based on whether check data is stored in a predetermined backup area (step S21TM1320).

  In this example, as a case where the process of step S21TM1320 is executed, (1) the setting is changed based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is off when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also off. When the process of step S21TM1320 is executed immediately without transition to any of the mode and the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is OFF. There is a case where the process shifts to the setting confirmation mode based on the presence and the process of step S21TM1320 is executed after the setting confirmation mode ends.

  If backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power-off detection process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power on not at the time of recovery from the stop of power supply is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). The determination is made and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), the CPU 103 performs gaming state recovery processing (processing of step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning the gaming control microcomputer 100 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 102) and step S21TM1360 To step S21TM1350. The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, short time flag, restricted member state specification flag, initialized flag etc.), output port output An area where the status is stored (output port buffer), a part where data indicating the number of unpaid award balls are set, and the like. The setting value storage area (the area in which the determined setting value is stored) is also included in the portion that should not be initialized. Further, an area in which each total value (game information which can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as a reciprocation ratio, a winning ratio, and a base is stored for each setting value is also included in the portion that should not be initialized.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1360). In the game control timer interrupt process described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the setting value read out here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (a command at the time of recovery) as a command at the time of power supply recovery (step S21TM1370). Based on the reception of the backup command (the command at the time of recovery), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the recovery from the power failure has been performed based on the data at the time of the power supply stop. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, recovery from power failure is performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop. Can be reported. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  If, at step S21TM1310, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES) or if backup data is not stored at step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), then step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), the initialization process is executed (step S21TM1410).

  In this example, as a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed, (1) Setting based on that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on The case where the initialization processing of step S21TM1410 is executed immediately without shifting to any of the change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 On the basis of the fact that the step S21TM1320 or the step S21TM1330 is determined to be NO based on the fact that the step S21TM1410 is not immediately transitioned to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the initialization process is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is also ON, transition to the setting change mode is made, and (4) Based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the setting change mode ends. In the setting confirmation mode, there is a case where the initialization processing in step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that NO is determined in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 after the setting confirmation mode is ended. .

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply stop stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared and an initial value is set. However, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 are not cleared and are not changed before the RAM clearing process. In addition, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as reciprocity ratio, combination ratio, and base is stored for each setting value is not cleared, and each totaling for each setting value The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102. The start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S21TM1440).

  In addition, for the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random symbol counter for determination per normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. for selectively processing according to the control state. Initial value is set to the flag.

  Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode of transitioning to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, the present invention is not limited to this. Furthermore, the setting change mode is set on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode.

  After execution of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the setting value read out here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command specifying that the initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended) (step S21TM 1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 reports that initialization of the game state or the like has been performed in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, for example. It is possible. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to the CPU 120 for effect control (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect to be executed when the big hit gaming state ends different according to the designated set value.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes setting processing of the serial communication circuit 21TM 505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21). Further, communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 performs, for example, processing in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for special image display result determination.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every 2 ms.

  Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510), and when execution of display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. The setting is made (step S21TM1540). In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to be a reach when not being a big hit, The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, with the initial value random number, the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) is determined to generate a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal pattern. Is a random number to The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 100 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided on the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round (take the random number for determination per normal pattern) When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command (step S21TM1140) and then transmits the initialization command at power on. (Step S21TM1460) The setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). In addition, when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220) and then transmits a backup command upon power failure recovery or an initialization command upon power on (step S21TM1370 or step S21TM 1460), transmits a setting command (step S21TM 1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command and the initialization command, and thus the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by the effect device such as the lamp 9 or the like. The effect control CPU 120 can also specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command and the reception of the backup command or the initialization command, and the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by the effect device such as the game effect lamp 9 or the like.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), and a switch is executed by executing a predetermined switch process on the condition that no game stop error has occurred (NO in step S21TM1615). The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 is determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, when a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch process of step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

  For example, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). It is detected that the magnetism of the determined level is detected, that the vibration of the level determined to be abnormal by the vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, the level and frequency band determined to be abnormal by the radio wave sensor (not shown) Based on the fact that the radio wave is detected, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred.

  Subsequently, when the game ball is won in any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the large winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A When there is an input of a detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, the number of winning balls corresponding to winnings by each detection signal A prize ball process (step S21TM1630) for setting etc. is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays a winning information processing (step S21TM1640) that calculates winning information such as a winning ratio, a winning ratio, and a base, and displays winning information such as a winning ratio, a losing ratio, and a base calculated in the winning information processing. 21. A winning information display control process (step S21TM1650) to be displayed on 21TM029 is performed. Thereafter, by executing predetermined main-side error processing (step S21TM1660), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, the various sensors described in step S1615 detect an abnormality (game stop error), and when an abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection flag is set, and the step in the next timer interruption is performed. The game may be stopped in S21TM1615 (the switch process is not performed). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information, payout information, etc. supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. (Step S21TM1670).

  Subsequent to the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random number MR1 and the random numbers MR1 to MR4 used on the main substrate 11 side is executed (step S21TM1680 ). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the device 4B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, a normal symbol process processing is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20, and the variable symbol display of the normal symbol and the movable wing in the variable winning ball device 6B. It enables tilting operation setting of one piece and the like.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the settings in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit, effects After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 12, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the switch to the off state, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is transmitted, or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or fluctuation display has ended. The setting value may be periodically notified to the effect control board 12 by transmitting the information including the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the existing command such as, etc. Furthermore, by receiving these commands from the main substrate 11, the effect control board 12 (the CPU for effect control 120) executes an effect that suggests the set values that have been set at various timings, such as during variable display or during a big hit game. May be

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the process related to the setting change mode (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200 of the main process) and the RAM clear (step S21TM1410 to step S21TM1420 of the main process) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the display monitor is stopped by stopping the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 The display on 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), the clerk of the game arcade is a clear switch (setting change switch) on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing). ) When the power is turned on while operating the 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the processing of step S21TM1130 and step S21TM1140 is executed by the CPU 103, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (this In the example, the setting value “1” is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area in the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the set value "1" is displayed. Step S21TM1150).

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (C), when the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, the CPU 103 is a clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade. Every time an operation is detected, the numerical values (setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A are sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, each time the clear switch (setting change-over switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is 1 → 2 → 3 → Update display as 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → .... Here, even if the clear switch (setting change-over switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (in this example, the setting value "1") itself is not changed depending on the operation. When the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 described later is executed, the set value (set value “1” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. The value is changed (overwritten) to the value (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (D), the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the store clerk in the game arcade or the like (YES in step S21TM1180). The numerical value (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (the setting value “1” in this example) stored And the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value "2") is determined (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the first display section 21TM029A to notify the store clerk or the like at the game arcade that a new set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and control of the setting change mode is ended. (Setting completion notification) is performed (step S21TM1200).

  Once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF, the numerical value displayed on the first display section 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area, even if the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated. Neither the stored setting value “2”) nor the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value “2”) is changed. If it is possible to change the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A even after the setting value is decided, there is a possibility that the setting value may be changed even if the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF. Therefore, in the present embodiment, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed.

  Then, the setting change mode (from step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) is ended, and the CPU 103 executes the process of clearing the RAM (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state at the time of power interruption stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared and the initial value is set. As a result, the gaming state is initialized, but the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 are not cleared and are not changed before the RAM clearing process. Also, when the pending storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the pending storage is cleared. After the process of clearing the RAM is completed, the CPU 103 informs the store clerk of the game arcade that the process of clearing the RAM has been performed by displaying “C” on the first display unit 21TM029A (notified of clearing the RAM). (Step S21TM1420). As a result, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade grasps that the setting change mode has ended (the set value has been determined) and the initialization process has been executed. Then, by executing the processing of step S21TM1430 or later, it becomes possible to execute a state in which a game is possible, that is, a variable display result, a jackpot type, a determination lottery of a change pattern, payout of a winning ball, and the like.

  In the setting change mode according to the present embodiment, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The initial display displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited, and the setting value most advantageous for the player ("6" in the present embodiment) or the most disadvantageous for the player A set value ("1" in the case of this embodiment) may be displayed.

  In addition, the CPU 103 notifies the display monitor 21TM029 of the setting ratio (setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) after notification of the RAM clear with the end of the setting change mode. Each total value such as the ratio and the base may be displayed. Further, for each setting value, each total value such as a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base corresponding to each setting value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending order or descending order of the setting value).

  When the power is turned off without setting the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state while being controlled in the setting change mode, the set value of the RAM 102 is set because the lock switch 21TM051 is not set to the OFF state. The setting values stored in the storage area have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the process of the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the display monitor is stopped by stopping the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 The display on 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), on the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is on (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is off When the power is turned on (in the case of N in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the processing of steps S21TM1210 and S21TM1220 is executed by the CPU 103, and the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting values) “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value (in this example,) stored in the setting information temporary storage area in the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A). The set value "1" is displayed (step S) 1TM1230).

  It should be noted that unlike the case where the setting change mode is being controlled, when the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the first display unit is operated even if the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated by a salesperson of the game arcade or the like. The numerical value displayed on the 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. Temporarily, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A by the operation of the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 by the store clerk or the like at the game arcade (this example Then, when the setting value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, it may be misunderstood that the setting value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, even if the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting) The setting value "1" stored in the information temporary storage area is not updated and displayed.

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on the detection of the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the store clerk or the like in the game arcade (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the processing of step S21TM 1320 and subsequent steps, it becomes possible to execute a state in which a game is possible, that is, a variable display result, a jackpot type, a determination lottery of a fluctuation pattern, payout of award balls, and the like. That is, when the process in the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the process related to the RAM clear, except when the determination in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 is NO.

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display portion 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information) Neither the setting value “1” stored in the temporary storage area nor the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value “1”) is changed.

  As described above, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. If the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting switch If the condition for controlling the setting confirmation mode is satisfied, that is, 21TM052 is in the OFF state, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  In order to change or display the set value (to change to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), a clerk or the like at the game arcade turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on, but at this time the setting change mode In order to shift to the setting mode, an operation (clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052) for executing the initializing process is further performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initializing process is performed. Do not operate the. As described above, the store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which one of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control the game machine (or not to control either) when the power is turned on, and the initialization process is performed. It is also possible to select whether or not to execute.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the initialization process is not required to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (RAM clearing is not performed except when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, even if the game store clerk etc. wants to check the setting value while the player is playing a game, the game state is the same even if the power is turned off once and the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on thereafter. It will not be initialized and will not be a disadvantage for the player. On the game arcade side, it is possible to confirm the setting value without any trouble by the setting confirmation mode.

  In addition, the CPU 103, upon completion of the setting confirmation mode, displays the setting value (setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, etc. Each total value of may be displayed. Further, for each setting value, each total value such as a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base corresponding to each setting value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending order or descending order of the setting value).

  9-17 show the setting change mode by the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, An example in which notification of transition to the setting confirmation mode is performed is shown. 9-17 (1) is an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled in the setting change mode, and FIG. 9-17 (2) is an image displayed when controlled in the setting confirmation mode The example of the image displayed on the apparatus 5 is shown, respectively.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (1), when the power is turned on (in particular, before the wait for effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM 1040 is completed), activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Accordingly, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is not in a light emitting state.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (1), for effect control based on the reception of the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1140 in the main processing. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode, and can notify that effect. For example, the character "in setting change" is displayed on the image display device 5, and an audio (for example, a sound saying "in setting change") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the setting is changed. By making the effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is informed that the setting change mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like provided with the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has been entered, and thus the setting change It becomes possible to clearly understand that the mode is being controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (1), other display information (for example, a rendering symbol, a small symbol, a fourth symbol, a right-handed display, etc.) in the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, the video display processor (VDP) can not supply a video signal to the image display device 5 (that is, the display control unit 123). When the control of the image display device 5 is not possible) until the image signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the control of the image display device 5 is possible by the display control unit 123) The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the sound notification and the light emission notification are performed in advance. That is, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a voice (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed") to notify that the setting has been changed to the setting change mode, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blink mode). By emitting light, it is informed that it has shifted to the setting change mode. After that, when it becomes possible to supply the video signal to the image display device 5 (that is, when the control of the image display device 5 becomes possible by the display control unit 123), the sound notification and the light emission notification can be made. In addition, notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the characters “setting change in progress” are displayed on the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (1), based on the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or in step S21TM1460, the CPU 103 The effect control CPU 120 determines that the game control microcomputer 100 has ended the setting change mode, based on the reception of the power-on initialization command transmitted to the effect control board 12). It is possible to notify that. For example, a character of “setting change end” is displayed on the image display device 5, and a voice (for example, a voice saying “setting change in progress”) is notified to notify that the setting change mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R is entered. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode) by the game effect lamp 9, it is notified that the setting change mode has ended. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended in the image display device 5 or the like provided with the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so the setting change mode is It is possible to clearly grasp the end.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing and is in a game-ready state (the timer interrupt processing for game control is In accordance with the execution), the effect control command for displaying the demo screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (2), when the power is turned on (in particular, before the wait for effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM 1040 is completed), activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Accordingly, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is not in a light emitting state.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), for effect control based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1220 in the main processing. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and can notify that effect. For example, the character "in setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5, and an audio (for example, a sound "in setting confirmation") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify transition to the setting confirmation mode. By making the effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is informed that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like provided with the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode has been entered, and thus the setting confirmation It becomes possible to clearly understand that the mode is being controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), other display information (for example, a rendering symbol, a small symbol, a fourth symbol, a right-handed display, etc.) in the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, the video display processor (VDP) can not supply a video signal to the image display device 5 (that is, the display control unit 123). When the control of the image display device 5 is not possible) until the image signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the control of the image display device 5 is possible by the display control unit 123) The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the sound notification and the light emission notification are performed in advance. That is, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a voice (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed") notifying that the setting has been switched to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode By emitting light, it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. After that, when it becomes possible to supply the video signal to the image display device 5 (that is, when the control of the image display device 5 becomes possible by the display control unit 123), the sound notification and the light emission notification can be made. In addition, notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, on the image display 5, the characters "setting confirmation" are displayed.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (Or, step S21TM1370 or step The effect control CPU 120 is set by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the reception of the backup command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 at S21TM 1460 or the initialization command at power on). It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has ended and to notify that effect. For example, a character of “setting confirmation completed” is displayed on the image display device 5, and a voice (for example, a voice saying “setting confirmation is in progress”) notifying that the setting confirmation mode has been output from the speakers 8L and 8R. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode) by the game effect lamp 9, it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like provided with the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode has ended, so the setting confirmation mode is It is possible to clearly grasp the end.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing and is in a game-ready state (the timer interrupt processing for game control is In accordance with the execution), the effect control command for displaying the demo screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect to be executed when the big hit gaming state ends different according to the designated set value. 9-18 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. 9-18 (1) is an example in which the ending image of the "fine" mode is selected in the big hit end screen, and Fig. 9-18 (2) is the ending screen of the "cloudy" mode is selected in the big hit end screen. For example, FIG. 9-18 (3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen. Moreover, FIG. 9-18 (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table for determining the aspect of a setting suggestion effect based on the setting value which the setting command designated.

  In step S21TM1470 of the main processing, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a setting value to the CPU 120 for effect control. In addition, when the big hit game state ends, CPU103 transmits the command for production control in order to execute ending production in image display device 5 to CPU120 for production control. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of ending effect based on the stored setting value by storing the setting value designated by the received setting command in the RAM 102. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the big hit gaming state is over, the image display device 5 is stored together with a character (letter “BONUS finished”) notifying that the big hit gaming state is over. It is possible to display the ending image of the aspect (the aspect of sunny, the aspect of cloudy, the aspect of rain) determined based on the set value.

  In the table shown in FIG. 9-18 (4), when the setting value designated by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3, 4”, and “5, 6”. When the mode of setting suggestion effect is determined as the “fine” mode shown in FIG. 9-18 (1), the mode is determined as the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 9-18 (2); When determining to the "rain" mode shown in 18 (3), the judgment value is assigned.

  If the setting value designated by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting of “clear” mode shown in (1) at a low ratio (for example, 20%) Decided to execute the effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting indication effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) in a medium ratio (for example 40%), medium It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) in a proportion (for example, 40%) of. Further, when the setting value designated by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 is in the “fine” mode shown in (1) at a low ratio (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) in a proportion (for example, 30%) of. Furthermore, when the setting value designated by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, the effect control CPU 120 is in the “fine” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is decided to execute setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a low ratio (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) in a proportion (for example, 30%) of.

  As described above, by making the determination ratio of each aspect of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player is interested in what kind of aspect the setting suggestion effect is executed, and thus the setting suggestion I can improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player is interested in what kind of mode the ending effect to be executed when the big hit gaming state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is performed in the "fine" mode. You will expect to be

  Next, prize ball processing (step S21TM1630) in the main processing will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a winning ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main substrate 11 and the payout control substrate 21TM037 will be described.

  FIG. 9-19 is an explanatory drawing showing an example of the contents of a control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main substrate 11 and the payout control substrate 21TM037 in order to perform various controls regarding the payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 9-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main substrate 11 rises (when the gaming control microcomputer 100 starts the game control processing), and the main substrate 11 is output to the payout control substrate 21TM037. Is a signal (connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that it has risen. Further, the connection confirmation signal indicates that the winning balls can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output through the I / O port 21TM057 and the output circuit 21TM067 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the payout control is performed through the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is input to the microcomputer 21TM370. The connection confirmation signal is data of 1 bit each and is transmitted by one signal line. The connection confirmation signal can be output by setting the initial value to the bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, Is output by the process of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440).

  Similar to the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380. Further, various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are similar to the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 9-20 is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of a control command transmitted / received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (a prize ball request signal) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main substrate 11 and the payout control substrate 21TM037 in order to perform various controls relating to the payout control and the like.

  As described above, the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and are output as control commands indicating predetermined contents according to the set 8-bit data contents. Be done.

  The connection confirmation command is used to check whether the connection between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 is normal or not from the gaming control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1s). It is a control command to be sent. The content of the data of the connection confirmation command is "A0 (H)", that is, "1010000".

  The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a connection confirmation command. Is a control command to be transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of. The content of data of the connection OK command is "8x (H)", that is, "10000 xxx". Here, when a prize ball error (abnormal state in which a prize ball dispensing operation based on a prize or a ball loan dispensing operation based on a ball lending request can not be performed normally) occurs, "x" of the first bit Is set to "1". When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. In addition, when a ball breakage error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. In addition, when a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. Thus, while checking the connection between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is determined by the gaming control microcomputer 100 can be notified.

  The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number (0 to 14) of the game balls that make a payout request, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a winning. . The content of the data of the award ball count command is "5x (H)", that is, "0101 xxxx". In this embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, three winning balls are paid out, and the gaming ball is operated by the winning opening switch corresponding to the general winning opening 10 When it is detected, 10 winning balls are paid out, and when the gaming ball is detected by the count switch 23, 14 winning balls are paid out. Therefore, when the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, the winning ball number command "01010011" for notifying three winning balls is transmitted, and the general winning opening 10 is displayed. When the gaming ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, the winning ball number command "01011010" for notifying the number of winning balls 10 is transmitted, and when the gaming ball is detected by the count switch 23, the winning ball number A winning ball number command "01011110" for notifying 14 pieces is transmitted. The connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command are configured to be transmitted as a winning ball request signal. The prize ball number command is transmitted instead of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted based on the fulfillment of the payout condition (occurrence of winning etc.) of the award balls. In this embodiment, as described above, data corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but data corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the lower 4 bits with the upper 4 bits in common. You may do so.

  The award ball end command is a control command indicating that the award ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command that the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 transmits based on the end of the award ball operation. The content of the data of the award ball end command is "50 (H)", that is, "01010000". The award ball end command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the end of the award ball operation. In this embodiment, data indicating error information is not set in the prize ball end command. This is because the award ball end command is transmitted only once when the award ball operation is completed, so even if error information is not sent at that timing, data indicating error information is sent in the next connection OK command and sent Because it is possible to Data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the award ball end command.

  The prize ball preparing command is a control command for notifying that the prescribed ball error has occurred and the prize ball operation has not ended, and the prescribed error occurs while the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 executes the prize ball operation. It is a control command to send based on what has been done. The content of data of the connection OK command is "8x (H)", that is, "10000 xxx". Here, when a prize ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the first bit. When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. In addition, when a ball breakage error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. In addition, when a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this manner, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that a predetermined error has occurred during execution of the prize ball operation and the prize ball operation has not ended. And the contents of the error can also be notified to the game control microcomputer 100. Similarly to the connection OK command, the award ball preparation command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by making the contents of the lower 4 bits different according to the error state (different predetermined bits). Further, the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command, and the prize ball end command are configured to transmit any command as a reception ACK signal. The prize ball preparation command is a command (signal) which is output not only in the state where the prize ball operation can not be performed due to an error but also in the state in which the prize ball operation is being performed.

  In addition, based on the fact that the prize ball preparing command is in a state where the prize ball operation can not be performed due to an error, the connection OK command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted. is there.

  9-21 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving control signals shown in FIGS. 9-19 and control commands shown in FIGS. 9-20. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. The connection confirmation command and the number-of-balls command among the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and are input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Ru. Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command and the prize ball preparing command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the serial communication circuit incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100. It is input to 21TM505. 9 to 21 show two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a reception ACK signal) as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, in practice, the winning ball request signal and the reception ACK signal are transmitted and received on one signal line.

  Next, transmission and reception of signals (a prize ball request signal, a reception ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The prize ball request signal is composed of a connection confirmation command and a prize ball number command, and the reception ACK signal is composed of a connection OK command, a prize ball end command and a prize ball preparing command.

  9-22 is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-22, the gaming control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the signal line with the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 is disconnected via the serial communication circuit 21TM 505. A connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives a connection confirmation command as a winning ball request signal through the serial communication circuit 21TM380, it transmits a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a winning ball request signal after 1 s (one second) has elapsed from the time of reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 repeatedly execute the communication process of the connection confirmation as described above.

  Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. 9-23 is a flowchart showing the main processing performed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initialization. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM to an accessible state (step S21TM1860). Further, 0000 (H) is set as an initial value of the winning balls unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in timer mode. Therefore, in the setting process of the built-in device register in step S21TM1840 and the process of step S21TM1850, register setting for setting the channel to be used in timer mode, register setting for permitting interrupt generation, and setting interrupt vector Register setting is performed. Then, the interrupt by that channel is used as a timer interrupt. When it is desired to generate a timer interrupt, for example, every 2 ms, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register).

  The interrupt vector set to the channel set to the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the top address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. The timer interrupt process includes a process of controlling the payout means (a process of driving the payout motor 21TM289 according to a command signal related to at least the payout of the winning ball from the main substrate), and the payout motor 21TM289 is driven according to the ball lending request. Processing may be included).

  In this embodiment, the interruption control mode 2 is also set by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, it is possible to use interrupt processing based on count-up of built-in CTC. Also, the interrupt processing start address can be set according to the interrupt vector sent out by CTC. The interrupt based on the count up of channel 3 (CH3) of CTC is an interrupt generated when the internal clock (system clock) of the CPU is counted down and the register value becomes “0”, and is used as a timer interrupt .

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1880). Further, an initial value is set to a flag or a counter in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting an initial value of the winning balls unpaid quantity counter in the winning balls unpaid quantity counter.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes serial communication circuit setting processing for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM 380 to perform serial communication with the gaming control microcomputer 100 according to the same processing as the serial communication circuit setting processing (see step S21TM 2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100. Make settings for

  When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority of interrupt processing to be executed according to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 initializes the priority of interrupt processing according to the same processing as the initial setting processing of priority performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, the setting of the register of the CTC provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 is performed so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated (step S21TM 1920). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt occurrence interval is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). Since the interrupt is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initialization process, the interrupt is permitted before the initialization process is finished (step S21TM1930). Thereafter, loop processing is started to monitor the occurrence of the timer interrupt.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 is set to generate the timer interrupt repeatedly. When a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  9-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following process as the payout control process. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1 and reflecting the detection result on a predetermined 1 byte of RAM (referred to as input state flag). is there. When control is performed based on the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1 in the payout control process, the state of the input port is not checked directly but the input state. Check the status of the flag.

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 executes a payout motor control process (step S21TM 2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM 289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the pattern of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes prepaid card unit control processing to communicate with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM 2035). Furthermore, a control for paying out a rental ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050 is performed, and a control for paying out a number of winning balls indicated by a winning ball number command from the main substrate is performed. Is executed (step S21TM 2040).

  Then, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM 2050). Further, information output processing for outputting winning ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM 2060). Further, while performing predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, display control processing for lighting the award ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

  In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, a full tank error, an out-of-ball error, a prepaid card unit non-connection error) are detected in error processing to be described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 based on the fact that the error bit is set. Further, in the display control process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control for lighting the award ball LED 21TM053 while the award ball is being paid out. Further, when the winning balls are paid out, control is performed to turn off the winning balls LEDs 21TM053.

  Further, in this embodiment, although the RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, the payout control CPU 21 TM 371 outputs The contents of the port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer and the output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S 760: output processing). Output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer and output port 2 buffer are paid out motor control processing (step S21TM2020), prepaid card control processing (step S21TM2030), main control communication processing (step S21TM2035), information output processing (step S21TM2060) And the display control process (step S21TM2070).

  Next, in the main control communication process of step S21TM2035, an operation in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits and receives various commands will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for serially communicating various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball count command shown in FIG. 9-20 from the game control microcomputer 100 using the serial communication circuit 21TM380. Also, when receiving the winning balls number command, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the winning balls ACK command “D2” as a reception confirmation signal using the serial communication circuit 21TM380.

  Further, like the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 receives an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM 380 while in the interrupt enabled state, an interrupt for which the serial communication circuit 21 TM 380 has made an interrupt request. Execute interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interrupt process when it is determined that the interrupt cause is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the reception data. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received reception data. Note that the payout control CPU 21TM 371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM 380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt process. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 determines whether or not the received data read in the reception interrupt process is a prize ball number command. When the received data is a prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 may add the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball unpaid number counter. If so, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set in the main control communication process described later, and the number of prize balls is determined. There is no need to execute the process of adding to the unpaid piece counter.

  9 to 25 are for the ball lending to be executed between the main substrate 11 (microcomputer for gaming control 100), the payout control substrate 21TM037 (microcomputer for payout control 21TM370) and the payout motor 21TM289, and the card unit 21TM050. It is a block diagram for demonstrating communication processing of. Here, as will be described later, as a method of limiting the ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289, there are the first ball lending limiting method to the fourth ball lending limit method described below.

  First, in the first ball lending restriction method, the payout control board 21TM037 (disbursement control micro) from the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) is controlled during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). (2) The second ball lending restriction method is to use the PRDY for the card unit 21TM050 from the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a method of stopping the output of a signal. (3) In the third method for limiting the limit of ball lending, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 equipped with the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The period during which the payout control substrate 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is used to stop the output of a signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 to the payout motor 21TM289. Further, (4) the fourth method for restricting the lending of a ball to a card is the EXS to the card unit 21TM050 from the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) during the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a method of stopping the output of a signal.

  Since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power on, the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, there is a possibility that the game media of the appropriate quantity corresponding to the lending request can not be dispensed. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiments, the ball lending in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is limited. Hereinafter, the first ball rental restriction method to the fourth ball rental restriction method will be specifically described.

  9 to 26 are timing diagrams for explaining communication between the main substrate 11 of the gaming machine, the payout control substrate 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the payout control board 21TM037 turns the PRDY signal in the ON state when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on in the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13 (see FIG. 9-19). When power supply is started, the card unit 21TM 050 turns on a VL signal as a connection signal.

  When a card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, the payout control board 21TM037 turns ON the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and from the card unit 21TM050 When the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of limiting ball lending in a period controlled in the setting change mode, there are the first to fourth ball lending limit methods described above. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS.

  9 to 27 show main substrate 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and payout control board 21TM 037 (payout) when CPU 103 of game control microcomputer 100 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting check mode. It is a timing diagram for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. While processing in the mode or setting confirmation mode is being performed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 does not put the PRDY signal in the ON state. That is, even if the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state, but is in the OFF state. maintain.

  As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 not in the ON state but in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM 289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the ball lending (payout of gaming media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM 062 is operated.

  As described above, during the time in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not set the connection confirmation signal to the ON state, whereby the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is performed. It can be made not to run. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not performed (the occurrence of the ball lending error) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not in the ON state.

  When the CPU 103 completes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When the dispensing operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Output That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and executes the subsequent ball loan payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state where the timer interrupt process for game control can be executed), the configuration which can control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is adopted by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052. Even if it is the case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 9-27 is applicable. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the output of the connection confirmation signal based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (switching from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, on the basis of the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by turning the PRDY signal OFF or not turning the EXS signal ON. Not to be

(The second ball lending limit method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state in the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state also in the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on even during the setting change mode period. Shall be Also, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned ON at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is maintained ON even during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be

  9 to 28 show main substrate 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and payout control board 21TM 037 (payout) when CPU 103 of game control microcomputer 100 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting check mode. It is a timing diagram for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main substrate 11 to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state also while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the state of communication with the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM 505, as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100. When the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state (that is, in the state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050) with the VL signal, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the gaming control microcomputer Even in the state of being electrically connected to 100), while the CPU 103 is executing processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while not receiving the connection confirmation command), the PRDY signal is turned ON. Not in state, in OFF state.

  As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 not in the ON state but in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the ball lending (payout of gaming medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, the payout control microcomputer 21 does not receive the connection confirmation command because the gaming control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled. Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned ON. Thus, the payout control of gaming media by the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 can be prevented from being executed. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not performed (the occurrence of the ball lending error) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not in the ON state.

  When the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, transmission of the connection confirmation command is resumed. Based on the restart of the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Output That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and executes the subsequent ball loan payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state where the timer interrupt process for game control can be executed), the configuration which can control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is adopted by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052. Even if this is the case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-28 is applicable. Also, regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 (whether it is in the ON state or in the OFF state), the PRDY signal can be output (set to the ON state). Even when the above configuration is adopted, the second ball lending limit method shown in FIG. 9-28 is applicable. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Switch to the OFF state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball rental from being performed during the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Third ball rental restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. As long as the operation is not possible, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is normal for the gaming machine frame 3 to be open during the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Become. As described above, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  9-29 is a main substrate when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 9-29, it is based on the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). And the PRDY signal is not turned on. When the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state (that is, in the state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050) with the VL signal, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the gaming control microcomputer Even in the state of being electrically connected to 100), while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is not turned on but turned off.

  As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 not in the ON state but in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, BRDY signal, BRQ Since both the signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Lending (payout of gaming media) is not executed.

  As described above, during the time when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). By detecting the open state of the PRDY signal, the PRDY signal is not turned on. Thus, the payout control of gaming media by the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 can be prevented from being executed. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not performed (the occurrence of the ball lending error) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not in the ON state.

  Then, when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade performs an operation of turning the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state, the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Furthermore, a game clerk or the like in the game arcade closes the gaming machine frame 3 in order to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played, whereby the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. 21TM 300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Output That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and executes the subsequent ball loan payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state where the timer interrupt process for game control can be executed), the configuration which can control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is adopted by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052. Even if it is the case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-29 is applicable. Also, regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 (whether it is in the ON state or in the OFF state), the PRDY signal can be output (set to the ON state). Even when the above configuration is adopted, the third ball lending limit method shown in FIG. 9-29 is applicable. That is, during the time when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the gaming machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal is not turned ON. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball rental from being performed during the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (a detection signal of the open state is inputted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). Not limited to such a mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main substrate 11 (a detection signal of the open state may be input to the gaming control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Stop the output of the connection confirmation signal (switch from ON state to OFF state). As a result, on the basis of the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by turning the PRDY signal OFF or not turning the EXS signal ON. Not to be

(The fourth ball lending limit method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state also during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on even during the setting change mode period. Shall be Also, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned ON at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is maintained ON even during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be

  9 to 30 show main substrate 11 (microcomputer for game control 100), payout control board 21TM 037 (payout) when CPU 103 of game control microcomputer 100 is executing processing of setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main substrate 11 to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state also while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the state of communication with the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM 505, as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is on. When the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state (that is, in the state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050) with the VL signal, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the gaming control microcomputer When it is in the state of being electrically connected with 100, the PRDY signal is turned ON regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  When the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 When the PRDY signal is in the ON state, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Here, in the payout control board 21TM037, although the PRDY signal is in the ON state and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, the connection confirmation command is not received from the gaming control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM 050 is not turned on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state (that is, in the state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050) with the VL signal, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the gaming control microcomputer 100) the PRDY signal is in the ON state (that is, the state in which the dispensing operation is possible by the dispensing control board 21TM037), and the BRDY signal is in the ON state (that is, the ball rental switch 21TM062). Is set, and the BRQ signal is in the ON state (that is, the state in which a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal turned ON). While processing in the change mode or setting confirmation mode is being executed (while the connection confirmation command is not received It is without EXS signal ON state to the OFF state. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, ball lending (payout of gaming media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, the payout control microcomputer 21 does not receive the connection confirmation command because the gaming control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. Thus, the payout control of gaming media by the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 can be prevented from being executed. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not performed (the occurrence of the ball lending error) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not in the ON state.

  Then, the card unit 21TM 050 stops the output of the BRQ signal when the predetermined time passes while the EXS signal is in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned ON (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out). Do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM 050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the BRQ signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

  When the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, transmission of the connection confirmation command is resumed. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Output That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and the card is based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state. The EXS signal to the unit 21TM 050 is turned on to execute the following ball loan payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state where the timer interrupt process for game control can be executed), the configuration which can control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is adopted by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052. Even if it is the case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 is applicable. Also, regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 (whether it is in the ON state or in the OFF state), the PRDY signal can be output (set to the ON state). Even if the above configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending limit method shown in FIG. 9-30 is applicable. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn ON the EXS signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball rental from being performed during the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Also, in FIG. 9-30, after the BRQ signal is turned ON, when a predetermined time elapses with the EXS signal turned OFF (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 is displayed. Shows an example in which the BRQ signal returns to the OFF state and the BRDY signal also returns to the OFF state, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the EXS signal remains in the OFF state after the BRQ signal turns to the ON state. Even if a predetermined time has elapsed, the BRQ signal may be maintained in the ON state, and the BRDY signal may be maintained in the ON state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode has ended), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. The EXS signal may be turned on based on the fact that all are in the on state. Here, when the EXS signal is in the ON state, (1) the ball rental switch 21TM062 is not operated again, and the BRQ signal is in the OFF state, and the ball rental is automatically executed (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, the ball lending process according to the ball lending operation received within the period of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be executed. In response to the switch 21TM062 being operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and the ball lending may be performed.

(How not to execute ball lending restriction in setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction in the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state also during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on even during the setting change mode period. Shall be Also, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned ON at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is maintained ON even during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be

  9 to 31 show main substrate 11 (microcomputer for game control 100), payout control board 21TM 037 (payout) when CPU 103 of microcomputer 100 for game control is executing processing of setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main substrate 11 to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state also while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues the transmission of the connection confirmation command even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the state of communication with the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM 505, as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and that the connection confirmation command is received. When the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state (that is, in the state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050) with the VL signal, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, with the gaming control microcomputer 100). When it is in the state of being electrically connected and in the state of receiving the connection confirmation command, regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal To the ON state.

  When the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 When the PRDY signal is in the ON state, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control board 21TM037 outputs an EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and the connection confirmation command is being received. Is turned on, and the fall (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of gaming media to the player.

  As described above, even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, whereby the connection confirmation command is continuously received. At the control microcomputer 21TM 370 side, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on. In this manner, the payout control of gaming media by the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 can be executed even during a period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode It is possible to reduce the control load for preventing the payout control from being performed during the controlled period. In addition, while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, inspection etc. can also be performed on the communication function between the card unit 21TM 050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the workability can be improved. it can.

  The CPU 103 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command even after the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended. On the basis of continuing reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the payout of a predetermined number of game media is completed and the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped in the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. . That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM 050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. As described above, in a period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the EXS signal may be turned from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may be turned from the ON state to the OFF state. Further, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, when the payout of the predetermined number of game media is finished and the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM 050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. As described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the EXS signal may be turned from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may be turned from the ON state to the OFF state.

(How to restart the ball rental after the setting change mode ends)
Next, with regard to processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power supply interruption while the ball rental is being executed, and control is subsequently made to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, see FIG. It demonstrates concretely using. In the example shown in FIG. 9-32, the payout of gaming media is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power failure while the payout of gaming media is being executed, and control is made in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. Resume the dispensing that has been suspended after the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  9-32 show main substrate 11 (microcomputer for gaming control 100), payout control substrate 21TM037 (disbursement control) when payout control substrate 21TM037 (microcomputer for payout control 21TM370) is executing payout of gaming media. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. While the payout control substrate 21TM037 is executing payout of gaming media, the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control substrate 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  If power is cut off while payout control board 21TM037 is executing payout of gaming media, the output of the connection confirmation signal from main board 11 is stopped, and the output of PRDY signal from payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. Ru. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM 289 is stopped, and the payout of gaming media is interrupted. At this time, data on the number of unpaid pieces is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the paid-out number counting switch 21TM301, which is input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of unpaid money is a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM 289 (that is, the number of paid-out pieces designated by the gaming control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM 301 (ie, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM 289).

  Thereafter, on the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be the game control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. While processing in the mode or setting confirmation mode is being performed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 does not put the PRDY signal in the ON state. That is, even if the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state, but is in the OFF state. maintain.

  As a result, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 not in the ON state but in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being performed, the payout of gaming media is not performed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When the dispensing operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  Then, the power supply is resumed, and the payout control is performed based on the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled when the power is turned on (the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the PRDY signal is turned on). The microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the contents of the unpaid quantity storage buffer stored in the RAM in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and one by one until the unpaid quantity data becomes 0. Perform a payout operation. As a result, the payout of gaming media which has been interrupted by the power-off and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. As described above, when the power is cut off during the ball lending and the payout of gaming media is interrupted, the setting is made even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of the subsequent power supply recovery. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the suspension of the gaming medium being suspended and complete the ball lending.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, the payout process is interrupted when the power is cut off during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode An example is shown in which the interrupted payout process is resumed after the end of the session, but this power-off is due to the salesclerk of the game arcade turning off the power switch 21TM055 to change or confirm the set value. It may be a power-off that has occurred, or it may be a power-off that has occurred due to the power switch 21TM055 being turned off with the end of business of the game arcade. Further, not only when the power is cut off, during the payout process, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, or the glass door frame 3a is opened. In response to the detection of the state, the payout process being executed is interrupted, and thereafter, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the interrupted payment process It may be resumed.

(Forced termination method of the ball rental with power failure)
Next, with respect to the processing in the case where the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) when the power is cut off while the ball lending is being executed, and the payout is not resumed after the power is restored, specifically using FIG. explain. In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when the power is cut off while the payout of the game medium is being executed, the payout being executed is stopped, and when it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, The dispensing is not resumed, and the dispensing is not resumed even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended.

  9-33 show main substrate 11 (microcomputer for gaming control 100), payout control substrate 21TM037 (disbursement control) when payout control substrate 21TM037 (microcomputer for payout control 21TM370) is executing payout of gaming media. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. While the payout control substrate 21TM037 is executing payout of gaming media, the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control substrate 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  If power is cut off while payout control board 21TM037 is executing payout of gaming media, the output of the connection confirmation signal from main board 11 is stopped, and the output of PRDY signal from payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. Ru. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, and forcibly terminates (cancels) the payout of the game medium. At this time, data on the number of unpaid pieces is not stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 (or, the unpaid number storage buffer itself is not provided) Therefore, as described below, after the power is restored, the payout of game media corresponding to the number of unpaid money is not executed.

  Thereafter, on the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be the game control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. While processing in the mode or setting confirmation mode is being performed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, even if the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state, but is in the OFF state. maintain.

  As a result, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 not in the ON state but in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being performed, the payout of gaming media is not performed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When the dispensing operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. In addition, since the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not backed up, a predetermined number of balls to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power failure occurred (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode with power restoration) Of the number of gaming media (ie, the number of payouts designated from the gaming control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout is not made for the number of unpaid payouts not paid out due to the withdrawal (forced termination) of payouts. It does not happen. As described above, if power is cut off while the ball rental is being performed, the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped), and thereafter, when the power is restored, the setting change mode or setting is performed for the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By not executing payout for the number of unpaid pieces after completion of the confirmation mode, it is not necessary to back up data of the number of unpaid pieces and restart the payout, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when power failure occurs during dispensing, by not backing up the data of the number of unpaid pieces, the payout being executed is forcibly terminated (canceled) halfway through, Not limited to such a form, as in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, when a power failure occurs, the data of the number of unpaid items is backed up, and after the power is restored, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode On the condition that it is not controlled by any, the payout of gaming media equivalent to the number of unpaid pieces is executed based on the data of the number of unpaid pieces backed up (resumption of payout is restarted based on backup data) When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout of the game medium equivalent to the number of unpaid money is not executed (the payout based on the backup data is not resumed), and the setting change is made. After mode or setting confirmation mode end also not perform the payout of unpaid coin number corresponding to the game medium may be so.

  In addition, during the game (the state where the timer interrupt process for game control can be executed), the configuration which can control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is adopted by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052. Even if it is the case, the forced termination method of the ball loan accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33 is applicable. Also, regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 (whether it is in the ON state or in the OFF state), the PRDY signal can be output (set to the ON state). Even if the above configuration is adopted, it is possible to apply the forced termination method of the ball lending accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Prize ball payout control)
9 to 34 are timing diagrams showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 in the normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Receive a connection OK command as. When receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits again the connection confirmation command as the winning ball request signal after 1s (one second) has elapsed from the time of reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 repeatedly execute the communication process of the connection confirmation as described above.

  When there is a winning when there is no communication processing of connection confirmation (from the reception of a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal to the transmission of a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls as a winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball count command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the prize balls of the number designated by the prize ball quantity command, and the payout of the prize balls (prize ball payout operation) When the game is completed, a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When receiving the prize ball end command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal after 1s (one second) has elapsed from the time of reception.

  Although not shown, there is a prize during execution of the communication process of connection confirmation (from the transmission of the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the reception of the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal). If the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls as a winning ball request signal, the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal is output from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, it is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball count command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the prize balls of the number designated by the prize ball quantity command, and the payout of the prize balls (prize ball payout operation) When the game is completed, a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During the execution of the payout of the winning balls (winning balls paying-out operation), a command for preparing the winning balls as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the microcomputer 100 for game control.

(Invalid in setup change mode or setup confirmation mode)
9 to 35 are timing diagrams showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing.

  As described above, until the CPU 103 executes the interruption permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 9-13, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the first general winning port switch to fourth The switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIG. 9-14) to confirm the state (presence or absence of detection signal) of each switch of the general winning a prize opening switch and the count switch 23 is not executed, and special symbol process including big hit judgment processing etc. The process (step S21TM1690 shown in FIG. 9-14) and the like are not executed. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it does not detect the detection signal output from each switch, and does not execute the big hit determination process or the like. That is, in the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the winning is invalidated even if the game medium passes each winning opening. Furthermore, since the switch processing is not executed, the detection of the gaming ball by the outlet switch 21TM 070 is not executed, and the counting of the base is not executed. That is, since counting of each item such as the ratio, duty ratio, and the base becomes unnecessary until the interrupt permission is executed, these items are controlled during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thus, the processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced.

  During the time when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the switch process and the special symbol process process, thereby invalidating the prize based on the game media having passed through each prize opening. I assume. That is, the prize ball number command is not transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370, and the big hit determination process or the like is not executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the winning balls number command from the gaming control microcomputer 100 is not received. That is, in the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control of the winning balls is not executed even if the game medium passes each winning opening.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, and the count switch 23 Switch processing to check the status of each switch (presence or absence of detection signal) can be executed, detection that game media has passed through each winning opening can be detected, and transmission of award ball number command (and connection confirmation command) is possible. Become. In addition, it becomes possible to execute special symbol process processing including the big hit decision processing.

  The game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which receives the connection confirmation command as a winning ball request signal receives an ACK. A connection OK command as a signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. At this time, when the game medium passes any winning opening (when a winning occurs), the CPU 103 executes a switch process to detect a winning, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 detects a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has sent the winning balls count command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and received the winning balls count command as the winning ball request signal, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to drive a predetermined number (for example, three) of them. Pay out game media. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  For example, during the setting change mode period in which the setting value may be changed, the switch process is executed to extract the jackpot determination random number, and the jackpot determination is executed based on the jackpot determination random number. And, in the case before the change, the big hit judgment will be executed based on the big hit judgment random number which will be a big hit with the setting value before the change but not the big hit with the setting value after the change (setting value after confirmation) In the setting value of, it does not become a big hit, but in the setting value after change (setting value after determination), a big hit determination may be performed based on a big hit determination random number which is a big hit. That is, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the jackpot determination and the set value becomes complicated, and the player or the game arcade may be disadvantaged.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is controlled, the jackpot determination is not performed by not executing the payout of the winning balls based on the game balls having passed through the respective winning openings, thereby determining the big hit. In addition to preventing the relationship between the execution timing and the setting value from becoming complicated, the disadvantage of the player or the game arcade is prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed but also in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can not be changed, the winning is similarly invalidated and the big hit determination process is not performed. I have to. Assuming that the setting confirmation mode is different from the setting change mode, control can be performed when the game control timer interrupt process is being executed instead of when the power is turned on, and the switch processing is also performed during the period when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. When the special symbol process processing can be executed, a control completely different from the setting change mode is required, which causes a problem that the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is increased.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, control is possible only when the power is turned on in the same manner as in the setting change mode, and the payout ball is not executed based on the game ball having passed each winning opening. By not executing the process, the process is shared to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the timer interrupt setting is performed after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). . Therefore, the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, and the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period during which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Winnings in have been revoked. On the other hand, if the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, etc., is a game stop error occurring during the period when the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, ie, during the game? If it is determined (step S21TM1615) and it is determined that a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), the subsequent switch process (step S21TM1620) and the special symbol process process (step S21TM1620) in the same interrupt process (step S21TM1615) The winning is disabled because S21TM1690) is not executed. As described above, the method of invalidating the prize (stopping the game) differs between when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the game stop error occurs.

  By stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the award ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 while the gaming control microcomputer 100 is being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection control command as a winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 based on the fact that the connection OK command is not received in the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible not to cause the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 to execute the payout control of the game media by not transmitting the prize ball number command of the above. Thus, based on the fact that the gaming control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 does not execute the payout control. It is possible to invalidate the winnings.

  In addition, during the game (the state where the timer interrupt process for game control can be executed), the configuration may be such that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be controlled by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052. . Even in the case of adopting such a configuration, the method shown in FIG. 9-35 is applicable, and based on the fact that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 , Switch processing and special symbol processing should not be performed.

  Further, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the switch processing when being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration in which detection of the fact that the game medium has passed each winning opening is possible) As well. When such a configuration is adopted, as described above, for payout control by stopping transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The microcomputer 21TM 370 does not execute the payout control, invalidates the winning, and prevents the special symbol process from being executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the special symbol process processing is executed while the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is resumed in a state where the switch processing can be performed.

(Payment restriction method during game machine frame, door frame opening detection)
9-36 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 during the detection of the game machine frame / door frame opening. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the normal operation. Receive a connection OK command as a signal. At this time, when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door The open state of the frame 3a is detected.

  In the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the glass door frame 3a is opened), the prize balls to be paid out Because the path through which the game is flowing is not physically connected to the upper tray on which the winning balls that have flowed down are stored, if the winning balls are paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate It will fall without doing it. Here, with the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a open, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the special winning opening The microcomputer 100 for gaming control transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the microcomputer 21 TM 370 for payout control when passing of gaming media is detected at any of the winning openings of The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detecting the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and the prize ball preparing command as the reception ACK signal is transmitted to the microcomputer 100 for game control. Send to In this prize ball preparation command, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a The transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until it is closed.

  As described above, during a period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is configured to pay out the payout motor 21TM289 even when the gaming media pass through the respective winning openings and detect a winning. Do not execute the payout control of the winning balls without driving the. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 ends the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout motor 21TM289. Drive and execute payout control of a predetermined number (the number designated by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within a period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. . Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  In addition, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected while the payout balls are being paid out, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 interrupts the payout of the prize balls, and the winning balls are received. The data of the number of unpaid pieces out of the number specified by the number command is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 ends the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven to execute payout control of gaming media corresponding to the number of unpaid payouts. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which has paid out the game medium transmits a winning ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  In addition, during the game (the state where the timer interrupt process for game control can be executed), the configuration which can control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is adopted by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052. Even in this case, the payout limiting method during detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame shown in FIG. 9-36 is applicable. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. It is considered impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and the game is performed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. It is normal that the machine frame 3 is open. During a period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted so that the payout of the winning balls is prevented. As a result, the payout of the prize ball in the period controlled in the setting change mode is limited while the control in the setting change mode is performed.

  Next, control in the case where a power failure occurs in the setting change mode will be described based on FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2).

  9-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power-off divided into separate charts based on the difference in the situation at the time of the power-off. The pattern related to the power failure shown in Fig. 9-37 (1) shows the control when the power failure occurs under the condition that "set value finalization" is not performed in "setting value change in progress". The setting value at time is the setting value at the time of the previous power on. 9-37 (2) shows the control in the case where a power failure occurs under the condition that “setting value decision” is performed in “during setting value change”, and the pattern related to power failure is shown in FIG. 9-37 (2). The setting value at the time of recovery from disconnection is the setting value at the time of power failure.

  That is, in FIG. 9-37 (1), the setting is performed when the power is cut off in the state where the “set value finalization” operation is not performed in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state (lock switch 21TM051 remains ON). Fig. 9-37 (2) shows the control related to the setting value when the power failure occurs after the operation of "setting value confirmation" in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state. It shows.

  9-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the work of setting change from the upper stage to the lower stage according to the order of occurrence (see "order" column and "status" column) ). 9-37 (1) and (2), the "lock switch" column shows the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (orders 1 to 8), " The column of “setting value” indicates data of setting values in each situation (setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102). Further, the display contents (setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in each situation are shown in the column of “setting value display” in the figure. There is.

  When the setting change operation is performed, as shown at the top of the column of "Situation" in Fig. 9-37 (1), there is power-on (order 1) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the right side in the figure As shown in the "lock switch" column, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is in the ON state. Also, in FIG. 9-37 (1), the “set value” at the time of “power on” in order 1 is that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at this time is “1”. , Has become "1".

  In addition, at this stage, the display contents of the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display section 21TM029A) shown in the column of “set value display” are blank (blank) because the power has just been turned on, and Since it is before the process (step S21TM1150) of reading out and displaying the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, display of the setting value is not started.

  After the status of "power on", it becomes the status of "setting change mode start" (order 2). Then, in this "setting change mode start", as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the "lock switch" column is "ON", and the "set value" column is the RAM 102. The setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is “1”, as described above. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is read out and displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) to be “1”.

  Subsequently, when the setting value change is in progress (order 3), the "lock switch" column remains "ON", and it is assumed that the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated. As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), since the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “setting value” column remains “1”, but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the setting value stored in the area from “1” to “2”, the “setting value display” column (setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is It changes to "2" which is the selected new value.

  Furthermore, when the setting value change is in progress (order 4), the "lock switch" column remains "ON", and when the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), since the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “setting value” column remains “1”, but the setting information temporary storage area Is changed from “2” to “3”, the “set value display” column (the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected It changes to "3" which is the new value.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the power is turned off during the "set value change" (order 5), the operation for fixing the set value is not performed, and the set value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the process of overwriting the setting value stored in (the process of step S21TM1190 for determining the setting value) has not been executed, the "setting value" field remains "1". That is, when a power failure occurs, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of “1” when the power is turned on. Here, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased by the occurrence of the power-off.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is ON and power is turned on (order 6), then In the “setting change mode start” status (order 7), the setting value (“1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Since the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is displayed, the "set value" column remains "1", and the "set value display" column also becomes "1". The same applies to the case where control is performed in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode in order 7.

  As described above, when the power is turned off after the power is turned on, the setting change mode is entered, and the setting change operation is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state). Since the setting values stored in the storage area have not been changed, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after power recovery are The setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the previous power-on (before the occurrence of power-off). As described above, it is possible to properly set the setting value in the case where the power is cut off while being controlled to the setting change mode.

  Next, control when a power failure occurs after the setting value is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 9-37 (2). Descriptions of processing parts in common with the case where the power is cut off before the setting value is determined will be omitted. When a power failure occurs after the setting value is determined, “setting value determination” shown in order 5 is performed after “setting value change in progress” shown in order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for fixing the setting value is performed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is “1”, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area ( The display monitor 21TM029 (the set value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of "3". Then, in the setting change mode, the “lock switch” column is “OFF” based on the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off.

  That is, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode (YES in step S21TM1180), “1”, which is a setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102, is stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The stored setting value (the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A)) is overwritten by “3”, whereby the setting value is determined (step S21TM1190). As a result, "3" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

  Then, when a power failure occurs in this state (order 6), the process of overwriting the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 of determining the setting value) is executed. The column of "set value" is "3". That is, at the time of power failure, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to “3” different from that at the time of power on. Here, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased by the occurrence of the power-off.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (order 7), the following “setting change mode start” status ( In the order 8), the setting value ("3" in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A Since the "set value" column is "3", the "set value display" column is also "3". The same applies to the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled in order 8 instead of the setting change mode.

  As described above, when the power is turned off without the lock switch 21TM051 being in the OFF state while being controlled in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the OFF state. The setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted. Therefore, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade temporarily shifts the gaming machine to the setting change mode by mistake when the power is turned on, and further performs the setting change operation (the operation of the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052). Even then, by turning off the power switch 21TM055, it is possible to stop changing the setting value and return to the state before shifting to the setting change mode.

  Since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power on, the state of the gaming machine is unstable. However, as shown in Figure 9-37 (1), there is a problem that the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off, and the power supply is not turned off. When a disconnection occurs, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed from the time of power-on, whereby the setting value can be appropriately determined, and the control regarding the setting value is unstable. Can be avoided and appropriate control over set values can be performed.

  9-38, the effect device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the game (the state where the timer interrupt process for game control can be executed). An example is shown in which notification that an operation for changing the setting value has been performed is executed by (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9).

  FIG. 9-38 (1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the image display device 5 during the game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a game control timer interrupt process. When the main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, during the variable display of the special symbol) (game control) In step S21TM1660 of the timer interrupt process for the game, a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control) (step S21TM1710 in the game control timer interrupt process) ) When it is detected that the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of timer interrupt processing for game control), the setting change switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 has been operated Command, production control board 12 And it transmits to the effect control CPU 120) (step a game control timer interruption process S21TM1710). That is, in order to notify that the operation for changing the setting value has been performed, the lock switch operation command and / or the setting change switch operation command is transmitted.

  As shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control) changes the setting change mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting switch operation command. Although it is not controlled in any of the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to specify that the operation for changing the setting value has been performed and to notify that effect. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “The operation of the lock switch has been detected.” Further, based on the reception of the setting change switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification is displayed to display the characters "The operation of the setting change switch has been detected."

  In this example, the effect control CPU 120 detects that “the operation of the lock switch and the setting switch is detected” as the abnormal operation warning notification based on the reception of both the lock switch operating command and the setting switch operation command. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the abnormal operation warning notification has a display priority higher than the background image and the decoration pattern (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decoration pattern), as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the decoration Even during the variable display of the symbol, the store clerk or the like at the game arcade has performed an operation for changing the setting value although it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By clearly grasping it, it is possible to confirm whether or not fraud has been made. In addition, a voice notifying that the operation for changing the setting value has been detected is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "the operation of the lock switch and the setting change switch has been detected"). By emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a red blinking mode), it may be notified that the operation for changing the setting value has been detected.

  In this embodiment, only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt process is executed), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be controlled. If normal, the setting value is changed or confirmed. The operation to do (operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052) is not performed within a period in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Therefore, within the period when the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is being executed, or during the period when the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed, the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is a line If this is the case, there is a possibility that the setting value is about to be tampered with.

  In the present embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 are operated at timings other than when the power is turned on or during a period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the image display apparatus 5 which is the largest display device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is informed that the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value have been performed, and illegal I try to suppress.

  Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 are operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally opened, so the gaming machine frame and the door frame are opened. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the sensor 21TM300, and that effect is notified. Also, as described above, the ball lending is suspended or discontinued, and the winning balls are also suspended or suspended. However, with regard to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position opposite to the predetermined position is opened. Thus, it is possible to see the back side of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position from the position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (on the back side) Setting change switch) 21TM052 can be operated. That is, even when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position The operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be possible.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is used regardless of whether the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. When it is operated, notification of the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value is performed to strengthen the suppression of the fraud.

(Signal for changing setting)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main substrate 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 9-39, the information output circuit 112 in the present embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from the first terminal to the tenth terminal, and signals corresponding to the respective information output terminals are output. Be done.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse-like signal that is output each time ten prize balls are paid out, and the pulse width is 0.1 seconds. A gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is output from the second terminal. The game machine frame / door frame open signal is turned on when the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM 300, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It will also be on when it is

  From the third terminal, an all symbol determination number signal is output. The total symbol determination frequency signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived (displayed), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the display result is derived It is a pulse-like signal that is output when displayed (when confirmed), and the pulse width is 0.5 seconds. The fourth terminal outputs an all start port signal. The all starting opening signal is a pulse-like signal which is output when a game ball winning a first starting winning opening occurs, and is also output when a game ball winning a second starting winning opening occurs. The pulse width is 0.1 seconds.

  A jackpot 1 signal is output from the fifth terminal. The jackpot 1 signal is in the ON state when being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. Two jacks are output from the sixth terminal. The jackpot 2 signal is ON when being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and is also ON when being controlled to the high base state. That is, a period in which the jackpot 1 signal is in the OFF state and the jackpot 2 signal is in the ON state can be identified as the high base state.

  The seventh terminal outputs a setting change corresponding signal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal which is turned on in a period controlled in the setting change mode and turned on also in a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Further, as described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse shape (special mode) after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the external apparatus side specifies the set value by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

  An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal which is output each time 10 out balls (the game balls shot into the game area and led to the discharge port) are detected by the discharge port switch 21TM 070, and the pulse width is 0 It is 1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. The winning signal corresponds to each winning opening (each winning opening) (a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a large winning opening, a first general winning opening to a fourth general winning opening). It is a pulse-like signal that is output each time a winning is detected by the switch) and is output each time ten winning balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 second.

  A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is performed when the power is turned on. In addition, when cheating is detected, it will be in the ON state for 4 minutes. In the case where an illegal act is detected, for example, the case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and an abnormal frequency is given to each winning opening (for example, the game ball is given 15 times or more per 30 seconds to the first starting winning opening). Based on the fact that the game ball is winning in the case of winning), etc., it is determined to be an abnormal winning. In addition, it also includes when switch abnormality detection occurs, the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt process 10 consecutive times or more (1) It is determined that the switch abnormality is detected based on the fact that the start port switch is in the ON state). Also, when the abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the on state continues until the power is turned off based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, and the abnormal magnetism is not detected after the power is turned on ( It becomes ON state for 4 minutes after error cancellation).

  Furthermore, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the security signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and is in the ON state also in the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. .

  Thus, the security signal can be output from the 10th terminal, and the setting change response signal can be output from the 7th terminal, so that the possibility of fraudulent activity can be notified to the outside, It is possible to externally notify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (that the process related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and thereafter stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the current setting value being output is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), when transitioning to the setting change mode at the time of power on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal A security signal is output. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting change mode.

  Also, as shown in Fig. 9-40 (2), when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode at power on, the setting change response signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, the security signal from the tenth terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode at the time of power on (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. 9-40 (1) Similarly, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  If the RAM clear is executed without transitioning to either the setting change mode or the setting check mode at power on, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal Is not turned on.

  Thus, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal is not executed, at least the input of the security signal is not input. It is possible to recognize that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled.

  The setting change response signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, but regarding the security signal, the setting change mode (or the parity in the setting confirmation mode) based on the execution of the RAM clear. Even when the result of the check is not normal), it remains ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, when the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, it can be recognized that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled, and the security signal input period reaches 30 seconds. If not, it can be recognized that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. That is, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear may be executed without being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, such as management of a hall computer etc. If the apparatus can recognize and if the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize temporarily that the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled, and the security signal input can be performed. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the external side by the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal is not executed, at least the input of the security signal is not input. It is possible to distinguish and recognize the possibility that the RAM clear has been executed and the possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 9-40 (3), the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. In this configuration, a security signal is output during a period controlled in the setting change mode while a security signal is not output during a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and a period controlled in the setting change mode. No output of the security signal, and a configuration in which the security signal is not output even during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, when the setting change corresponding signal is turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the OFF state of the security signal is maintained based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed. That is, when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not performed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (5), the RAM is cleared after being controlled in the setting confirmation mode at power on. In the case (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is turned ON for 30 seconds after the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change corresponding signal).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (4), the configuration may be such that the security signal is not output during the period controlled in the setting change mode. That is, when transitioning to the setting change mode at power-on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. In the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, when the RAM clear is executed without shifting to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode at power on. Although the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  In this manner, while the setting change corresponding signal is in the ON state while the security signal is in the OFF state while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or By setting the security signal to the ON state for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned to the OFF state), when one signal is in the ON state, the other signal is in the OFF state. Relationship. Such a relationship simplifies signal output control (both output signals are simplified because both signals are not in the ON state), and the external device clearly indicates the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (6), when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300, the game is started from the second terminal The machine frame and door frame open signal is output, and at the same time, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the completion of the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Even after the machine frame and door frame open signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  Here, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal and the security signal is output from the tenth terminal, but usually the output terminal Because there is a restriction in the assignment of, it may be difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to the setting change compatible signal. The example of pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39 (2) shows an example in which the setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal to which the security signal is output.

  In the pattern 2, the first to sixth terminals, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as the assignment of signals in the pattern 1. In pattern 2, unlike pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is in the ON state when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is performed when the power is turned on. In addition, when cheating is detected, it will be in the ON state for 4 minutes. In the case where an illegal act is detected, for example, the case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and an abnormal frequency is given to each winning opening (for example, the game ball is given 15 times or more per 30 seconds to the first starting winning opening). Based on the fact that the game ball is winning in the case of winning), etc., it is determined to be an abnormal winning. In addition, it also includes when switch abnormality detection occurs, the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt process 10 consecutive times or more (1) It is determined that the switch abnormality is detected based on the fact that the start port switch is in the ON state). Also, when the abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the on state continues until the power is turned off based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, and the abnormal magnetism is not detected after the power is turned on ( It becomes ON state for 4 minutes after error cancellation).

  Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 9-39 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal which is turned on in a period controlled in the setting change mode and turned on also in a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Further, as described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse shape (special mode) after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the external apparatus side specifies the set value by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the common terminal.

  Thus, by being able to output the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the possibility that fraudulent acts have been made to the outside, and an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal is provided. It is possible to notify outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (that the process related to the setting change may have been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting check mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the tenth terminal is temporarily turned off (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting check mode is After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the 10th terminal becomes the OFF state), and thereafter from the same 10th terminal, a number of pulse shapes corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the setting change corresponding signal is output, the set value can be notified to the outside. Then, since the setting change response signal is transmitted to the management device together with the gaming machine number (base number) through the relay device provided on the gaming machine island, the setting value based on the base number and the setting change response signal in the management device By correlating and displaying the predetermined value and the setting value determined in advance, it is possible to perform processing such as to display in a contrastable manner. As a result, the manager of the game arcade can easily manage the actual setting values of the plurality of gaming machines through the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the administrator and the setting changed in the setting change operation are made The administrator can understand the inconsistency with the value. Then, when such a mismatch occurs, it is possible to optimize the management regarding the settings in the plurality of gaming machines in the game arcade by performing the setting confirmation or the setting changing operation again for the gaming machine. it can.

  As described above, the setting change response signal is temporarily turned OFF with the end of the setting change mode and the end of the setting confirmation mode, but then corresponds to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 It is output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the number of pulses corresponding to the setting value is output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode. In this example, the same pulse as the number of set values is output. The width of the pulse is, for example, 0.1 second, and for example, when the set value is 3, a pulse with a width of 0.1 second is output three times at a predetermined interval (for example, an interval of 0.5 second). This makes it possible to easily specify the setting value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  As shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), in response to the control in the setting change mode at power-on, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is one. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode is ended without changing the setting value. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF, but based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being 1, the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode is A pulse of 1 is being output.

  As described above, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the setting value at the end of the setting change mode (when the setting value is changed It is possible to notify the setting value after change to the outside, and output a signal notifying whether the setting change mode is controlled or not and a signal notifying the setting value from the common information output terminal. Is possible.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are ended, a number of pulses corresponding to the setting value is output as the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode at a predetermined predetermined timing. Ru. Specifically, events related to the gaming state such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, that the big hit gaming state has ended, that the high base state has ended, that the number of prize balls paid out has increased by 1000 Or, when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected, that the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected, that the magnetic abnormality is detected, etc. And outputs a setting change corresponding signal in a special mode corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102). In the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), a pulse of 1 is output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode, triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

  This makes it possible to secure an opportunity to grasp the setting value of each gaming machine in the external device, for example, the external device because the setting change response signal is not properly input when the setting change mode is ended. Even if the setting value can not be specified on the side, it is possible to specify the setting value at a predetermined timing thereafter, and it is possible to strengthen the prevention of fraudulently changing the setting value by an inappropriate method.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned ON in response to the control in the setting change mode at the time of power on. Here, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is one. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed from 1 to 3 as a result of changing the setting value. In this case, with the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and the setting change is supported based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 becoming 3. Three pulses are output as a signal. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), three pulses are output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode, triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (1), the operation to change the setting value (the operation of the setting switch 21TM052) is not performed when the setting change mode is being controlled, and the setting value is not changed. In the case and as shown in FIG. 9-41 (2), the setting value is changed by the operation (the operation of the setting switch 21TM052) for changing the setting value while being controlled to the setting change mode. In any case, after completion of the setting change mode, the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. There is. As described above, when the setting change mode is controlled, the common signal output process is performed along with the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the setting value change is actually performed. , Signal output processing can be simplified.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned ON in response to the control in the setting confirmation mode at the time of power on. Here, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is one. Then, in the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is left unchanged at 1. In this case, upon completion of the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF, and the setting change corresponding signal is 1 based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being one. A pulse of 1 is being output. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), a pulse of 1 is output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode, triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

  As described above, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the setting value notified in the setting confirmation mode (setting value storage of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on) The setting value stored in the area, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be notified to the outside, and a signal for notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the setting value Can be output from the common information output terminal.

  In addition, in the assignment pattern 2 of the information terminal shown in FIG. 9-39 (2) described above, when the RAM clear is executed along with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is After 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it becomes an OFF state, and thereafter from the same 10th terminal, a number of pulse shapes corresponding to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (special mode The setting change corresponding signal of) is output.

(Modification of game control main processing)
Next, another embodiment relating to the game control main processing of FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44. 9-11 to 9-13 show an example in which the initialization process (RAM clear) is performed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 9-44, after the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed, the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 9-11, when the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 to an accessible state (step S21TM1060), the process proceeds to step S21TM2110 in FIG. 9-43 and clear input via the input port The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

  When the ON state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 clears the setting switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on. A RAM clear flag indicating that it has been operated is set (step S21TM2210), and initialization processing is executed (step S21TM2220). The series of processes (steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) involved in the initialization process are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the OFF state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110 (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing in step S21TM2120 and subsequent steps. Do. The process shown in step S21TM2120 to step S2170 is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1320 to step S21TM1370 shown in FIG.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on after transmitting the backup command at the time of power failure recovery at step S21TM2170 or after transmitting the initialization command at the time of power on at step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 of FIG. 9-44). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is set or not, that is, the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. (Step S21TM2320).

  When the RAM clear flag is set, that is, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at power on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 can change the setting value in the setting change mode. (Step S21TM2330 to step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Control the processing state to the setting change mode based on the The process shown in step S21TM2330 to step S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200 of FIG. After the process of step S21TM2400 is executed, the set RAM clear flag is erased (step S21TM2410), and the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  When the RAM clear flag is not set, that is, when the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 confirms the setting in which the set value can be confirmed. The mode is shifted to (step S21TM 2510 to step S21TM 2540). That is, although the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on is satisfied, the second condition that the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is ON is not satisfied when the power is turned on. Control the processing state to the setting confirmation mode based on the The process shown in step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240 in FIG. When it is confirmed in step S21TM2540 that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  Here, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is temporarily determined as NO in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 of FIG. The RAM clear flag is not set even when the processing of (1) is executed. As a result, the determination in step S21TM2320 is NO, and the setting change mode is not entered. As described above, even when the initialization process (the initialization of the gaming state by the RAM clear) is performed, the second condition that the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is on is not satisfied at the time of power on. Is not controlled to the setting change mode.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, a series of processes relating to step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 is the step S21TM1470 illustrated in FIG. This is the same as the series of processes shown in step S21TM1540, and the description will be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44, when controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits the initialization command (step S21TM2270) at the time of power on, and then the setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). And a setting command (step S21TM2550). In addition, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command after transmitting the backup command at the time of power failure recovery or the initialization command (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270) at the time of power on (step S21TM2520) is transmitted, and a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command and the reception of the setting command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by the effect device such as 9th. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command, and can determine the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by the effect device such as 9th. According to such a configuration, it is possible to receive the setting command without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting confirmation mode end command) for specifying that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended. Since the effect control CPU 120 can identify that the setting change mode or the setting check mode has ended, it is possible to suppress the number of commands. That is, the control load on the gaming control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Other Modification on Feature 21TM)
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the switch for changing the setting value is common to the clear switch for initializing (clearing the RAM) the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. A switch for changing the key is provided on the main substrate 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect the operation), and a switch different from the clear switch for initializing the game machine (clearing the RAM) It may be With such a configuration, the position of the switch for switching the setting value and the position of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) as compared to the case where the switch for switching the setting value is provided on the power supply substrate. As a result, when changing the setting value, the confirmation of the setting value and the switching operation according to the confirmation of the setting value become easy, and the workability can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the setting value is displayed in the partial display area (the first display section 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 in which the game information such as the aggregated base is displayed. The display monitor 21 TM 029 is not limited to such a form, and is a display device different from the display monitor 21 TM 029 for displaying the collected gaming state, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying set values, provided on the main substrate 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly grasp separately the collected game information and the set value individually, and therefore, it is easy to change the set value according to the collected game information. Work efficiency can be improved.

  In addition, while the clear switch for initializing (RAM clear) the gaming machine is provided, the switch may not be provided for changing the setting value. In such a configuration, when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode, the setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) are automatically changed in order (for example, 1) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6) and it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display section 21TM029A) when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from ON state to OFF state. The setting value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is stored in the setting value storage area (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is stored in the setting information temporary storage area) The set value may be determined by overwriting the set value. The store clerk at the game arcade was displayed at that time by switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be confirmed is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) The set value can be determined as the set value of the gaming machine.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media to the upper tray or the lower tray based on the occurrence of winning, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. It may be an enclosed type game machine in which game media are sealed in the game machine and a score is given based on the occurrence of a winning. In the enclosed game machine, the information regarding the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be included in the information periodically transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control substrate 21TM037. For example, being controlled to the setting change mode, being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, being within a period controlled to the setting change mode, being within a period being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, being a setting value Information indicating that the operation for changing the setting mode has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, or the like may be included. In addition, the information output circuit 112 may transmit such information to a management device such as a hall computer, and the hall computer may be configured to specify that each gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. .

  In the above embodiment, it is within the period controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12, or within the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, etc. An example in which is notified is shown, but not limited to such a form, the microcomputer 100 for game control is the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special based on being controlled in the setting change mode. It may be made to notify that it is controlled to setting change mode (for example, 7 segment indicator is made to emit light in the first notification mode) by the symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, etc., the setting confirmation mode Control is performed in the setting confirmation mode by the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, etc. based on being controlled to Notification (for example, emit light to a different second notification manner from the first notification manner the 7-segment display) may be. Furthermore, a display (round number display) for displaying the number of rounds in the big hit game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and an instruction to the player to launch the game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area) In the case of providing an indicator (right-handed indicator) or the like to be displayed, these indicators indicate that the processing in the setting change mode is being executed, and the processing in the setting confirmation mode is being executed. You may make it light-emit in an aspect and.

  In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned ON when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and then the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the security Although the security signal is continuously turned on for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting check mode without turning off the signal, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the setting change mode is not limited thereto. Alternatively, when the security signal is turned ON when the setting confirmation mode is controlled and then the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended. At the same time, the security signal is temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then Utility signal specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) may be turned ON. By adopting such a signal output method, in an external device such as a hall computer or the like, a period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly identified, and it is clarified that the RAM clear is executed. Can be identified.

  With regard to the expectation degree suggestive effect shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star) according to the setting value of the gaming machine (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) and the big hit expectation degree. The selection ratio of (number of) may be changed. For example, even if the jackpot expectation is low, if the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), if the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, In the case of (1) or (2), an expected degree suggestive effect with three or more black stars may be executed at a higher rate. By setting it as such an effect configuration, even when the display result is lost, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high because the expectation degree indication effect of which the number of black stars is 3 or more is executed. Can be expected from the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expected degree suggestive effect is executed. In addition, even if the hit is a hit with a low degree of expectation, the player is expected to receive the pachinko gaming machine 1 by performing an expectation degree suggestive effect having a large number of black stars (for example, three or more). Since it can be expected that the set value is high, the interest can be improved even when the jackpot expectation is low.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted to set a predetermined bet number, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. Slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine equipped with one or more of a bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus, etc.). In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs depending on the setting value, and the setting value can be changed by controlling the slot machine in the setting change mode, and the setting value is changed by controlling the setting confirmation mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and Other Forms Concerning Feature 21TM]
Next, details and other embodiments of the above-described feature portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame comprises a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame not shown. In addition, the gaming machine frame is provided with a hinge mechanism portion not shown on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when viewed from the player), and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a respectively support the hinge mechanism portion. The other end side in the left-right direction (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) is connected rotatably in a direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door with the hinge mechanism as a fulcrum, the inside portion of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. On the other end side (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, a lock mechanism for fixing the other end side to the outer frame is provided.

  Further, the outer frame is a frame made of metal and serving as an outer shell of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a synthetic resin frame body to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape in which the center is penetrated when viewed from the front. The game board 2 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 from the front. The game board 2 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 is locked by the fixing device so as not to be removed from the gaming machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame in which the speakers 8L and 8R, the gaming effect lamp 9, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and the like are disposed. The glass door frame 3a is provided with a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a see-through window capable of visualizing a game area on the front of the game board 2 while protecting the game board surface.

  When the salesclerk of the game arcade performs maintenance of the game board surface (for example, measures to eliminate ball clogging, etc.), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state where the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. It is necessary to bring the other end side into an open state in which the other end side is separated from the outer frame by turning the mechanism portion (one end side) to the front side like a door as a fulcrum. In order for the store clerk at the game arcade to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052, the display change switch 21TM030, etc. arranged on the back side of the game board 2, also to visually recognize the display monitor 21TM029. The game machine frame 3 is rotated from the closed state in which the other end is fixed (locked) to the outer frame to the near side like a door with the hinge mechanism (one end) as a fulcrum. It is necessary to set the other end side to an open state separated from the outer frame.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, a detection signal capable of identifying that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal capable of specifying that the glass door frame 3a is open is output to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

(Process at power on)
10-1 and 10-2 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed in the gaming control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 and This processing corresponds to the processing shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-43 to 9-44. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, some of the processes (for example, the processes shown in FIG. 9-11 and the like) are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, after the power is turned on, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010). This process is the same process as the process shown in step S21TM1330 of FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 of FIG. 9-43, and a parity check is performed as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 confirms whether the setting change in progress flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting change-in-progress flag is set when setting change / confirmation processing to be described later is performed (step S21TM3510) and cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM3710).

  If the setting change in progress flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 matches the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with a normal value, for example, one of 1 to 6 It is checked whether or not it is (step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from a gaming machine maker (before being installed in the game arcade), a value (for example, 0) different from the above-mentioned legitimate value is stored in the set value storage area May be In addition, when the data in the setting value storage area is broken, the value may not be a regular value. If the set value is a proper value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is checked whether the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

  If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 clears the area excluding the setting value storage area, and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clear process in step S21TM3050, data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply stop stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared and the initial value Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as reciprocity ratio, combination ratio, and base is stored for each setting value is not cleared, and each totaling for each setting value The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized. In addition, the notification that the gaming state has been initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended. It may be performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command for designating that the initialization process has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 reports that initialization of the game state or the like has been performed in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, for example. It is possible.

  On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting change-over switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command in recovery) as a command in power supply recovery (step S21TM3045), The process moves to step S21TM3060. Based on the reception of the backup command (the command at the time of recovery), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the recovery from the power failure has been performed based on the data at the time of the power supply stop. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, recovery from power failure is performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop. Can be reported.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening is performed. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a are detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the microcomputer 100 for game control that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be recognized individually.

  A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected from the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 to the gaming control microcomputer 100, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. When the detection signal indicating that the game control microcomputer 100 is configured to output a detection signal (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be recognized individually.

  If the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), the CPU 103 checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3070). . Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to step S21TM 3510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or the setting check mode shown in FIG. When transitioning to the setting change mode, the setting value can be confirmed and changed, and when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, the setting value can be confirmed.

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), power is not interrupted during setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a normal value (step Change of the setting value and / or the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM3030) (YES in step S21TM3060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is on (YES in step S21TM3070) It becomes possible to confirm and shift to the normal game processing on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (NO in step S21TM3060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (NO in step S21TM3070) .

  In the present embodiment, although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to set the state where the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state; 2) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. The state where the CPU 103 can confirm the set value when it is confirmed that the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination process of step S21TM3060 and step S21TM3070 (setting confirmation (setting confirmation) Mode) can be transferred. Further, in addition to the conditions (1) and (2), (3) on condition that the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is determined to be in the ON state (YES) in step S21TM3040, As described later, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed.

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the set value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2 and is operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can not Temporarily, even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated means that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or some illegality. It is possible that means will check or change the set value. In this state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the setting value, so in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the confirmation mode. And it is made not to control any of setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, as one of the conditions (1), when either one of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although control is made possible, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of.

  On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3060 (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a When it is in the closed state, it shifts to the normal game processing. When it is confirmed in step S21TM3070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the process shifts to normal game processing. With the transition to the normal game processing, the processing corresponding to step S21TM1740 to step S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 9-13 or step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 shown in FIG. 9-44 becomes executable, and FIG. The game control timer interrupt process shown can be executed (special symbol process process etc. can be executed).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 indicates that the set value stored in the set value storage area may be abnormal. The setting value abnormal error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if the set value storage area stores the normal values (1 to 6), if part of the backup RAM area is broken, step S21TM3110 is executed, The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the values stored in the setting value storage area may be inappropriate.

  If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting change in progress flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormal error command to CPU 120 for effect control (step S21TM3110). ).

  Further, in step S21TM3030, when the set value storage area does not store the correct value (1 to 6) (NO in step S21TM3030), CPU 103 stores 0 in the set value storage area (step S21TM3100). And the setting value abnormal error command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Temporarily, in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), if the set value storage area does not store the normal value (1 to 6). 0 is set as the set value, and the set value abnormal error command is transmitted.

  When receiving the set value abnormal error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the set value may be abnormal in the image display device 5 (for example, the message “the set value is abnormal” is displayed. To do). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the setting value should be changed in the image display device 5 (for example, displays a message “Please change the setting value”). The speakers 8L and 8R may notify that there is a possibility that the setting value is abnormal (for example, it may output a voice "The setting value is abnormal."), And the setting value is changed. It may be notified that it should be in a state (for example, a voice "Please change the setting value." Is output).

  After transmitting the set value abnormal error command, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3120). If the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), the CPU 103 checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3130). .

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3140).

  If the clear switch (setting change-over switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3140), the CPU 103 clears the area including the setting value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clear process in step S21TM3150, data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply stop stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared and the initial value Is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is also cleared, and 0 is stored in the set value storage area. On the other hand, the area where each total value (game information which can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as reciprocity ratio, combination ratio, and base is stored for each setting value is not cleared, and each setting value The aggregate value is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized.

  Then, after executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command (step S21TM3160), and performs the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. Migrate to The backup command at the time of power failure recovery (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command at the time of power on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) are commands transmitted only once at the time of power on. Therefore, when transmitting the command at the time of power on, the CPU 103 can set the command transmission flag that can specify that the command at power on was transmitted and does not require backup storage at the time of power off. The command transmission flag may be cleared when the processing shifts to the normal game processing (step S21TM1470). Then, only when the command transmission flag is not set, it is possible to transmit the backup command at the time of power failure recovery (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command at the time of power on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160).

  On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a If it is in the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

  That is, if the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on). If it is judged YES in step S21TM3020) or if the set value is not a legitimate value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be played in this state, Before shifting to the normal game processing, it is necessary to fix the setting value of the setting value storage area to a normal value. Therefore, the area including the setting value storage area is cleared by the RAM clear (step S21TM3150) to shift to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, in order to make the setting value changeable (setting change mode). (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. The state where the set value can be changed (step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140), when the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied. It is possible to shift to setting change mode).

  If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so the set value of the set value storage area can be determined as a normal value. You can not shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if it is determined NO in any of the determination processes in steps S21TM3120, S21TM3130, and S21TM3140, the power is temporarily turned off, and (1) to (3) when the next power is turned on. The above conditions are all satisfied, the setting change mode is entered, and the set value of the set value storage area is decided to be a normal value.

  When one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 transmits a command for notifying that the power should be turned off to the CPU 120 for effect control. You may do it. Then, the effect control CPU 120 having received this command may display on the image display device 5 a message (for example, the characters "Please turn off the power") prompting to turn off the power. . When one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 determines in advance the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. By emitting light in the power-off instruction mode, the user may be prompted to turn off the power.

  Next, processing relating to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. In the processing of FIG. 10B, the CPU 103 sets a setting change in progress flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM 3510). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is held even when the power is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3520). If the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), the CPU 103 checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). . Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal and a security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the set value stored in the set value storage area It is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

  Further, the CPU 103 checks whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, the CPU 103 specifies that control in the setting confirmation mode has been made. The command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the process proceeds to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the CPU 103 sets that the control is changed to the setting change mode. The change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM 3585), and it is confirmed whether or not the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (step S21TM3590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

  If the setting selection switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 shifts the process to step S21TM3520. When the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 updates the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and proceeds to step S21TM3520. Transition.

  Here, the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM3585) And the state in which the setting value can not be updated (step S21TM3600) corresponds to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value can not be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040, the RAM clear flag is determined). Is controlled based on (1) being 0).

  Also, it is possible to execute the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540) and the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the execution of transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM3585) and the updating of the setting value (step S21TM3600). The state corresponds to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140). It is controlled based on that the RAM clear flag is set to 1.

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command transmitted only once at the time of setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting confirmation mode command, the CPU 103 can set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage at power off. When the setting change in progress flag is cleared (step S21TM3710), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command transmitted only once at the time of setting change mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting change mode command, the CPU 103 can set the setting change mode command transmission flag which can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage at the time of power-off. When the setting change in progress flag is cleared (step S21TM3710), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  If it is determined in step S21TM3530 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 clears the setting change in-progress flag (step S21TM3710). Here, since the flag under the setting change is cleared, it is determined that the flag under the setting change is not set (NO) in the processing of step S21TM3020 executed thereafter, and thus transition to the normal game processing is possible. Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying the setting value stored in the setting value storage area to the CPU 120 for effect control (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Moreover, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect corresponding to the setting value designated by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect to be executed when the big hit gaming state ends different according to the designated set value.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730), and confirms whether the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 or not (step S21TM3740).

  Here, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and power is cut off during the setting change. It is determined that the setting value is normal (YES in step S21TM3030) and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3040). (NO at step S21) and RAM clear (step S21TM3050) have not been executed, so it is sufficient to execute the normal processing at the time of power restoration, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Operation (Step S21TM3060 When the NO) has been confirmed, it may be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740) means that the RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and temporarily the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. If a regular setting value (1 to 6) is not stored in the setting value storage area before (before it is determined YES in step S21TM3530) (for example, in the setting change mode while the setting value is 0) It is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the regular setting values (1 to 6) in the setting value storage area when an operation to change the setting values is not performed). Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on process again, and executes the process of step S21TM3010 and subsequent steps.

  As described above, when the power is turned on, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns the lock switch 21TM051 ON and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 turns the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the setting change mode. While being able to control, it becomes possible to initialize game state and the like (step S21TM3050 or RAM clear of step S21TM3150 is executed). In addition, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting confirmation mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, as well as the gaming state etc. It is possible not to initialize (it is determined as NO in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140 and not to execute the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). As described above, the store clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state etc. There is.

  In the control shown in FIG. 10-2, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off in the state of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (NO in step S21TM3530), and the gaming machine frame 3 and When all the glass door frames 3a are in the closed state, it is determined as NO in step S21TM3520, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the standby state to be in the open state. At this time, the microcomputer 100 for game control instructs to notify that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and operates the lock switch 21TM 051 to confirm the setting change mode or the setting. A command instructing to notify that the mode should be ended may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Then, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received these commands, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. notify that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and the lock switch 21TM051 It operates to notify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode should be ended. For example, a message “Please open the gaming machine frame 3 and turn the lock switch 21TM051 into the OFF state and end the setting change mode” may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In addition, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the processing shifts to the normal game processing, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 when the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the operation of (the change from the off state to the on state), and (2) the setting changeover switch In response to the setting switch operation command being transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the operation of the clear switch 21TM 052 (the change from the off state to the on state). Become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control) is set based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting switch operation command. Although it is not controlled in any of the change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to specify that the operation for changing the setting value has been performed and to notify that effect. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “The operation of the lock switch has been detected.” Further, based on the reception of the setting change switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification is displayed to display the characters "The operation of the setting change switch has been detected." As a result, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade clearly grasps that the operation for changing the setting value has been performed despite the fact that neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, It can be checked if the

  It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended and the normal game processing has been performed, whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated. As described above, during the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process), the execution state of the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value is not checked during the period during which the game processing (timer interrupt processing for game control) is being performed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the gaming control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 10C is an explanatory view of a change of the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When the setting change mode is controlled, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed in step S21TM3550. At this time, if a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value is stored in the setting value storage area, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (1), the seven segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 The letter "E" is displayed. Therefore, the store clerk in the game arcade operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs setting change operation) while grasping that at least a regular value is not stored in the setting value storage area.

  Every time the store clerk in the game arcade operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example is shown in which the normal set value is in the range of 1 to 3. In this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

  As described above, when the value stored in the setting value storage area is not the normal value, the information corresponding to the information in the display monitor 21TM029 is different from the numeral (E in this example). Is displayed. This makes it possible to clearly understand that the setting value storage area stores a value different from the normal value, and to prompt the setting change operation. If a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value is stored in the set value storage area, the display monitor 21 TM 029 also displays the value (0 in this example), the manager of the game arcade There is a possibility that the lock switch 21TM051 may be turned off without performing the setting change operation, misunderstanding that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to any of the normal values. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the normal value is stored in the setting value storage area, the display monitor 21TM029 displays information different from the number (E in this example). , To prevent such misunderstandings, and to ensure that the setting change operation is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (1), when the setting change mode is initially controlled, if the setting value storage area stores a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value. The character “E” is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. However, if a setting change operation is performed even once thereafter and a normal value is stored in the setting value storage area, then Even if the setting change operation is performed any number of times, updating of the setting value is performed within the range of the normal setting value during the period controlled by the setting change mode (until the lock switch 21TM051 becomes the OFF state). The setting value storage area does not store a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value, and the display monitor 21TM029 also has information (E in this example) different from the normal value. Will not be displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when controlled to the setting change mode, step S21TM3550 is performed. Then, the regular set value (2 in this example) stored in the set value storage area is displayed. In this example, for the purpose of explanation, an example is shown in which the normal set value is in the range of 1 to 3. In this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of 3 → 1 → 2 → 3 and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2 → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3.

  That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, if the set value stored in the set value storage area is initially a normal value, the setting change operation may be performed any number of times thereafter. During the time when the setting change mode is being controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the setting value is updated within the range of the normal setting value, and the setting value storage area is a normal value. A different value (0 in this example) is not stored, and information (letter E in this example) different from the normal value is not displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  For example, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game arcade), the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 sets a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value. After that, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on at the game arcade side, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played if the setting value is not changed to the proper value through the setting change mode. become unable. Thereby, when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the setting value can be fixed to the correct value.

  In addition, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game arcade), the setting change flag is set in advance, and thereafter the game arcade side passes through the setting change mode. If the setting value is changed to a proper value and the setting change mode is not ended, it is impossible to play a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Thereby, when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the setting value can be fixed to the correct value.

(Ball lending restriction based on detection of open state of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a ball lending restriction method when the glass door frame 3a is opened when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened will be specifically described using FIG. 10-4 shows the main substrate 11 when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing chart for explaining the communication processing performed between payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) and card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 10-4, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Do not turn on the PRDY signal. When the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state (that is, in the state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050) with the VL signal, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the gaming control microcomputer Even in the state of being electrically connected to 100), the CPU 103 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state, but to the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  As a result, while the card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 not in the ON state but in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, Since both the EXS signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM 289 is not driven, the ball lending (payout of gaming media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM 062 is operated.

  Thus, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is in the ON state. It is supposed not to. Thus, the payout control of gaming media by the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 can be prevented from being executed.

  Then, in order to make the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played by the store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a into a closed state. The provided gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. When the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Output That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and executes the subsequent ball loan payout control.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since the operation can not be performed unless it is set to the open state, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be in the open state. That is, it is normal for the gaming machine frame 3 to be open during the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  Here, since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting check mode involve power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and the subsequent power on, the state of the gaming machine If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending processing or the prize ball processing is executed in such an unstable state, the game media of the appropriate quantity corresponding to the payout request may be dispensed. There is no possibility. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order for the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 to grasp the control status to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side, a command for that purpose, a determination process, etc. are necessary, and the control is complicated. There is a problem of becoming

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected while the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. During this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 does not execute the ball lending process and the prize ball process. As a result, regardless of whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled, payout control is not executed. As a result, the ball lending process and the winning ball process in the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode are limited without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side. Ru. With such a configuration, appropriate payout control is realized with regard to ball lending processing and winning ball processing.

  Thus, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected while the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. By limiting the payout control during the period, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect associated with the payout control such as not being able to pay out the game media of the appropriate quantity corresponding to the payout request, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a Maintenance work etc. of the gaming machine can be smoothly progressed when the game player is in the open state.

(Resume ball rental resumes after open state detection ends)
Next, due to the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a being opened in the middle of the ball lending, the payout is interrupted, and thereafter the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The process in the case where it is determined will be specifically described using FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10-5, it is based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the payout of gaming media is being executed. And interrupt the payout of the game medium, and resume the suspended payout based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not in the open state (is in the closed state).

  FIG. 10-5 shows the main substrate 11 (microcomputer for gaming control 100) and the payout control substrate 21TM037 (disbursement control) when the payout control substrate 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is executing payout of gaming media. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. While the payout control substrate 21TM037 is executing payout of gaming media, the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control substrate 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  When the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the payout control board 21TM037 is executing payout of gaming media, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Switches the PRDY signal from the ON state to the OFF state based on detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM 289 is stopped, and the payout of gaming media is interrupted. At this time, data on the number of unpaid pieces is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM 302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the paid-out number counting switch 21TM301, which is input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of unpaid money is a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM 289 (that is, the number of paid-out pieces designated by the gaming control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM 301 (ie, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM 289).

  During a period in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the PRDY signal. Does not turn on. That is, even if the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state, but is in the OFF state. maintain.

  As a result, during a period in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 not in the ON state but in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when it is a period during which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are not used. Since the payout motor 21TM 289 is not driven, the payout of gaming media is not executed.

  When it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door When it is detected that the open state of the frame 3a is ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  Then, based on the fact that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (that the PRDY signal is in the ON state), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout motor 21TM 289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM 302 in step b, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. Thereby, the payout of the game medium interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed.

  Therefore, among the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process which has been executed before the power failure (i.e., the number of payouts designated from the gaming control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), payout With respect to the number of unpaid pieces which have not been paid out, since the payout is to be executed, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be avoided.

(Ball loan processing at the time of power interruption (do not shift to setting change mode))
Next, the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power supply interruption while the ball lending is being executed, and the control is not performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power supply restoration, is specifically described using FIG. Explain it. In the example shown in FIG. 10-6, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power failure while the payout of the game medium is being executed, and control is made in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. Instead, after the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the interrupted payout is resumed.

  FIG. 10-6 shows the main substrate 11 (microcomputer for gaming control 100) and the payout control substrate 21TM037 (disbursement control) when the payout control substrate 21TM037 (microcomputer for payout control 21TM370) is executing payout of gaming media. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. While the payout control substrate 21TM037 is executing payout of gaming media, the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control substrate 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  If power is cut off while payout control board 21TM037 is executing payout of gaming media, the output of the connection confirmation signal from main board 11 is stopped, and the output of PRDY signal from payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. Ru. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM 289 is stopped, and the payout of gaming media is interrupted. At this time, data on the number of unpaid pieces is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM 302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370.

  Here, the store clerk at the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, when initializing the pachinko gaming machine 1, the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is further operated. Thereafter, on the main substrate 11, when power supply from the predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 10A is executed without being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Shall be Here, until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from the predetermined power source board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 causes the gaming machine frame 3 to be opened. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is open.

  Since the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal in the ON state. That is, even if the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state, but is in the OFF state. maintain.

  As a result, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 not in the ON state but in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. During the period in which the PRDY signal is in the OFF state), the game medium is not paid out.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When possible, turn on the PRDY signal. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on under the condition that no signal is sent.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is being controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. No payout of gaming media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is in the ON state, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, The ball lending process is prevented from being executed by maintaining the PRDY signal in the ON state and in the OFF state. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game arcade usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are displayed. Even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480) in order to bring it into the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state. In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is turned OFF based on the fact that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. .

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the gaming machine frame and the door frame open. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that neither the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned ON, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and The dispensing operation is performed one by one until the data becomes 0. As a result, the occurrence of the power-off and the payout of gaming media which have been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a are completed. As described above, when the power is cut off during the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. As a condition, it is possible to resume the interruption of the game media being suspended and complete the ball lending.

(Ball loan processing at the time of power interruption (transition to setting change mode))
FIG. 10-7 (1) is a block diagram showing an example of connection of the clear switch (setting change-over switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the RAM clear signal line in the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is a game control micro The data is input to the I / O 105 of the computer 100 and the I / O 21 TM 372 f of the delivery control microcomputer 21 TM 370. That is, the store clerk at the game arcade operates the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 to initialize the RAM 102 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 and clears the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Both clearing RAM and clearing are executed.

  Next, with regard to the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power supply interruption while the ball lending is being executed, and control is made in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power supply is restored, FIG. This will be specifically described using In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, so that both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 have the RAM clear signal. It shall be sent. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when the power is cut off while the payout of the game medium is being executed, the payout being executed is stopped, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Sometimes, the payout is not resumed, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout is resumed based on the execution of the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM 302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370. do not do.

  FIG. 10-7 (2) shows the main substrate 11 (microcomputer for gaming control 100) and the payout control substrate 21TM037 when the payout control substrate 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is executing payout of gaming media. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the (payment control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control substrate 21TM037 is executing payout of gaming media, the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control substrate 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  If power is cut off while payout control board 21TM037 is executing payout of gaming media, the output of the connection confirmation signal from main board 11 is stopped, and the output of PRDY signal from payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. Ru. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, data on the number of unpaid pieces is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM 302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370.

  Here, the store clerk at the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on in order to shift to the setting change mode (to further initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), and , Clear switch (setting selection switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, on the main substrate 11, when power supply from the predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from the predetermined power source board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 causes the gaming machine frame 3 to be opened. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is open.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, even if the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state, but is in the OFF state. maintain.

  As a result, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 not in the ON state but in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of gaming media is not executed even if the data on the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, and the processing after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. When the RAM clear process is executed, it is informed that the RAM clear is executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated at the time of power on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The data on the number of unpaid pieces stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  The connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When possible, turn on the PRDY signal. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on under the condition that no signal is sent.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is being controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. No payout of gaming media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is in the ON state, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, The ball lending process is prevented from being executed by maintaining the PRDY signal in the ON state and in the OFF state. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game arcade usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480), the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. It may be in an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state. PRDY signal is turned off based on the above.

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the connection control signal of the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 is in the ON state (processing of setting change mode or setting confirmation mode) And the PRDY signal is ON based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300. I assume.

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), it is for payout control. In the microcomputer 21TM370, the data on the number of unpaid pieces stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is not cleared (because there are remaining game media to be paid out), Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned ON, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. One by one until the data of the unpaid coin number becomes 0 performs a payout operation. As a result, the occurrence of a power failure, and subsequent control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming medium being interrupted due to the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a being opened. Disbursement of is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the ball lending and the payout of gaming media is interrupted, the setting is made based on the fact that the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power recovery. On the condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, resuming the payout of the gaming medium which has been interrupted, and complete the ball lending. Is possible.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the power is turned on, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated). In this case, since the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the data on the number of unpaid pieces stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining amount to be paid out). Since there is no game medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven even when the PRDY signal is turned ON, and the payout operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not yet formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Data on the number of unpaid pieces stored in the number-of-payouts storage buffer is initialized. As described above, since the data on the number of unpaid pieces is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode before the power is cut off. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out (ie, the number of payouts designated from the gaming control microcomputer 100, for example, 25) in the ball lending process being executed before) No payment is made for the number of pieces paid out.

  Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores data on the number of unpaid pieces stored in the RAM 21TM302. Can be simplified, so that management of data of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or the prize ball process can be simplified.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure during the execution of the ball lending process, the number of unpaid pieces stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is stored. Data on the number of unpaid pieces will be stored in the buffer. Here, since the data on the number of unpaid pieces is cleared by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the forced withdrawal (cancelled) is performed without resuming the interrupted payout. That is, at the time of power recovery, during the time when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout for the number of unpaid pieces is not performed.

(Modification of ball lending process (transition to setting change mode) when power interruption occurs)
FIG. 10-8 (1) is a block diagram showing an example of connection of the clear switch (setting change-over switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 described above is provided corresponding to the main substrate 11 (microcomputer for gaming control 100), and corresponds to the payout control substrate 21TM037. And another clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052. That is, the main board 11 (microcomputer for game control 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided with separate and independent clear switches.

  When the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is input to the I / O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  When the game store clerk initializes the gaming control microcomputer 100 and does not initialize the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is in the OFF state. Conversely, when initializing the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 without initializing the gaming control microcomputer 100, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off at the time of power on and cleared. The switch 21TM052a is turned on. Then, when initializing the game control microcomputer 100 and initializing the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when the power is turned on, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned on. I assume.

  Next, regarding processing when the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power supply interruption while the ball lending is being executed, and control is made in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power supply is restored, FIG. 10-8 (2) This will be specifically described using In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, whereby the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized, and when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM 302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the power is cut off while the payout of the game medium is being executed, the payout being executed is stopped, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. When the payout is not resumed and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the payout is resumed based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM 302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 is not executed. .

  FIG. 10-8 (2) shows that the main substrate 11 (microcomputer for game control 100) and the payout control substrate 21TM037 when the payout control substrate 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) executes payout of gaming media. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the (payment control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control substrate 21TM037 is executing payout of gaming media, the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control substrate 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  If power is cut off while payout control board 21TM037 is executing payout of gaming media, the output of the connection confirmation signal from main board 11 is stopped, and the output of PRDY signal from payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. Ru. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, data on the number of unpaid pieces is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM 302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370.

  Here, the store clerk at the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (to further initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. Also, the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, on the main substrate 11, when power supply from the predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from the predetermined power source board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 causes the gaming machine frame 3 to be opened. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is open.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, even if the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state, but is in the OFF state. maintain.

  As a result, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 not in the ON state but in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of gaming media is not executed even if the data on the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, and the processing after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. When the RAM clear process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear is executed. Further, in the present example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is operated at the time of power on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 The data of the number of unpaid pieces stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM 302 is erased (cleared).

  The connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When possible, turn on the PRDY signal. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on under the condition that no signal is sent.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is being controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. No payout of gaming media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is in the ON state, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, The ball lending process is prevented from being executed by maintaining the PRDY signal in the ON state and in the OFF state. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game arcade usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480), the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. It may be in an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state. PRDY signal is turned off based on the above.

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the gaming machine frame and the door frame open. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that neither the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM 302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM 052 a is not operated when the power is turned on) ) When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on))) Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the data on the number of unpaid pieces stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned ON (based on the presence of the remaining game media to be paid out), based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM 302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370. Then, the payout motor 21TM 289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data on the number of unpaid pieces becomes zero. As a result, the occurrence of a power failure, and subsequent control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming medium being interrupted due to the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a being opened. Disbursement of is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the ball lending and the payout of gaming media is interrupted, the setting is made based on the fact that the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power recovery. On the condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, resuming the payout of the gaming medium which has been interrupted, and complete the ball lending. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 backs up the RAM 21TM302. When the data of the number of unpaid pieces stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there are no remaining game media to be paid out), the PRDY signal turns ON Also, the dispensing motor 21TM 289 is not driven and the dispensing operation is not performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. I will not. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) targeted for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed by operating the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main substrate 11, the payout is made. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the data of the number of unpaid pieces stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is It is not initialized. As described above, whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for the game control microcomputer 100) is executed regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. Regardless of), if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data on the number of unpaid pieces is not initialized, and it is executed before the occurrence of a power failure (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode with power restoration) Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process (that is, the number of payouts designated from the gaming control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid payouts not paid out , Will be executed.

  Therefore, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data on the number of unpaid money stored in the RAM 21TM302 is not initialized, so the ball rental Data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the processing or the prize ball processing can be appropriately protected.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure during the execution of the ball lending process, the number of unpaid pieces stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is stored. Data on the number of unpaid pieces will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main substrate 11 is operated when the power is turned on, the data on the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared and maintained unless the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is operated. Therefore, the suspended payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of gaming media is completed. That is, after restoration of the power, a period corresponding to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is passed, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the payout for the number of unpaid pieces is executed.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (a detection signal of the open state is inputted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). Not limited to such a mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main substrate 11 (a detection signal of the open state may be input to the gaming control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Stop the output of the connection confirmation signal (switch from ON state to OFF state). As a result, on the basis of the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by turning the PRDY signal OFF or not turning the EXS signal ON. Not to be

(Prize ball payout restriction based on detection of open state of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a method of limiting the payout of the winning balls when the glass door frame 3a is opened when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-9. 10-9 is a game control micro computer when the gaming machine frame and door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the computer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. As shown in FIG. 10-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Receive a connection OK command as. When receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits again the connection confirmation command as the winning ball request signal after 1s (one second) has elapsed from the time of reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 repeatedly execute the communication process of the connection confirmation as described above.

  At this time, when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door The open state of the frame 3a is detected. In the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the glass door frame 3a is opened), the prize balls to be paid out Because the path through which the game is flowing is not physically connected to the upper tray on which the winning balls that have flowed down are stored, if the winning balls are paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate It will fall without doing it.

  In the example of FIG. 10-9, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, game control is performed. The microcomputer 100 detects the passage of game media relating to any winning opening of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the special winning opening The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the above, but detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. In this case, the microcomputer 100 for playing game preparation commands as a reception ACK signal is not executed without controlling the payout control of gaming media. To send. In this prize ball preparation command, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a The transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until it is closed.

  As described above, during the period when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is each winning opening The payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM 289 and does not execute the payout control of the winning balls even if the winning combination is detected. Thus, the payout control of gaming media by the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 can be prevented from being executed. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, in order to make the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played by the store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a into a closed state. The provided gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. When the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 drives the payout motor 21TM 289 when the payout operation is possible, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass The payout control of a predetermined number (the number specified by the number-of-balls command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the door frame 3a is detected is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

(Resume ball payout resumes after open state detection ends)
Next, the payout is interrupted by the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a being opened while the payout of the winning balls is being executed, and thereafter the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is The process in the case of being in the closed state will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state while the payout of the gaming medium is being executed. And interrupt the payout of the game medium, and resume the suspended payout based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not in the open state (is in the closed state).

  As shown in FIG. 10-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Receive a connection OK command as. When receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits again the connection confirmation command as the winning ball request signal after 1s (one second) has elapsed from the time of reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 repeatedly execute the communication process of the connection confirmation as described above.

  When there is a winning when there is no communication processing of connection confirmation (from the reception of a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal to the transmission of a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls as a winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 receives the prize ball count command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball count command. During the payout period of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened, and the gaming machine frame / door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the release sensor 21TM300 detects the release of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of gaming media. At this time, data on the number of unpaid pieces is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM 302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the paid-out number counting switch 21TM301, which is input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of unpaid money is a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM 289 (that is, the number of paid-out pieces designated by the gaming control microcomputer 100, for example, 14). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM 301 (ie, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM 289).

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a does not execute the payout control of the gaming medium, but uses a prize ball preparation command as a reception ACK signal for gaming control. It transmits to the microcomputer 100. In this prize ball preparation command, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a The transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until it is closed.

  As described above, during a period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM 289 even while the payout of the game medium is being executed. Do not execute payout of game media. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door When it is detected that the open state of the frame 3a is ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to be closed based on closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The payout motor 21TM 289 is driven based on the contents of the stored unpaid number storage buffer, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. Thereby, the payout of the game medium interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed.

(Procedure ball processing when power interruption occurs (does not shift to setting change mode))
Next, with respect to processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to a power failure while the payout of the prize ball is being executed and the control is not performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after power recovery, using FIG. This will be described specifically. In the example shown in FIG. 10-11, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power failure while the payout of the game medium is being executed, and control is made in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. However, after the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the suspended payout is resumed.

  As shown in FIG. 10-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Receive a connection OK command as. When receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits again the connection confirmation command as the winning ball request signal after 1s (one second) has elapsed from the time of reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 repeatedly execute the communication process of the connection confirmation as described above.

  When there is a winning when there is no communication processing of connection confirmation (from the reception of a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal to the transmission of a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls as a winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 receives the prize ball count command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball count command. When the power is cut off during the payout period of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, the game Suspend the delivery of media. At this time, data on the number of unpaid pieces is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM 302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370.

  Here, the store clerk at the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, when initializing the pachinko gaming machine 1, the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is further operated. Thereafter, on the main substrate 11, when power supply from the predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 10A is executed without being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Shall be Here, until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from the predetermined power source board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 causes the gaming machine frame 3 to be opened. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is open.

  Since the connection control signal from the main substrate 11 is in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in the stop state. As a result, after power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing predetermined processing to be power on processing (after the power is turned on, the control shown in FIG. 10-1 is performed without being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). In the communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480), since the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is in the stop state, the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained.

  As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM 289 is not driven, so the period during which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state (the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. During the period until S21TM1480) is executed, the payout of gaming media is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs a payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. Do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the dispensing motor 21TM 289 is driven to perform the dispensing operation on the condition that the loading motor 21 TM 289 is not set.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is being controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. No payout of gaming media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is in the ON state, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM 289, the winning ball processing is not performed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game arcade usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are displayed. Even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480) in order to bring it into the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state. In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the fact that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. It will be in the state and payout of gaming media will not be executed.

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the gaming machine frame and the door frame open. Based on the fact that neither the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300, the contents of the unpaid quantity storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Based on this, the payout motor 21TM 289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data on the number of unpaid pieces becomes zero. As a result, the occurrence of the power-off and the payout of gaming media which have been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a are completed. As described above, when the power is cut off while the payout of the winning balls is being performed and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed at the time of the subsequent power recovery. Under the condition, it is possible to resume the suspension of the game medium payout and complete the payout of the winning balls.

(Procedure ball processing when power interruption occurs (transition to setting change mode))
Next, with regard to processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power supply while the payout of the prize balls is being executed, and control is made in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after power recovery, see FIG. It demonstrates concretely using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, so that both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 have the RAM clear signal. It shall be sent. In the example shown in FIG. 10-12, when the power is cut off while the payout of the game medium is being executed, the payout being executed is stopped, and when it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, The payout is not resumed, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the payout is not resumed based on the execution of the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM 302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370.

  As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Receive a connection OK command as. When receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits again the connection confirmation command as the winning ball request signal after 1s (one second) has elapsed from the time of reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 repeatedly execute the communication process of the connection confirmation as described above.

  When there is a winning when there is no communication processing of connection confirmation (from the reception of a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal to the transmission of a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls as a winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 receives the prize ball count command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball count command. When the power is cut off during the payout period of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, the game Suspend the delivery of media. At this time, data on the number of unpaid pieces is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM 302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370.

  Here, the store clerk at the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on in order to shift to the setting change mode (to further initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), and , Clear switch (setting selection switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, on the main substrate 11, when power supply from the predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from the predetermined power source board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 causes the gaming machine frame 3 to be opened. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is open.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in the stop state. As a result, after power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing predetermined processing to be power on processing is controlled (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is controlled, and serial communication circuit setting processing shown in FIG. 10-1 (step S21TM1480). Since the driving of the payout motor 21TM 289 is stopped), the game media payout is maintained even if the data on the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared. It will be.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, and the processing after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. When the RAM clear process is executed, it is informed that the RAM clear is executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated at the time of power on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The data on the number of unpaid pieces stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  The connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. I do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the dispensing motor 21TM 289 is driven to perform the dispensing operation on the condition that the loading motor 21 TM 289 is not set.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is being controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. No payout of gaming media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is in the ON state, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM 289, the winning ball processing is not performed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk of the game arcade usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (from step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state in order to set the closed state. In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the fact that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. It becomes a state.

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the connection control signal of the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 is in the ON state (processing of setting change mode or setting confirmation mode) End) and the payout motor 21TM 289 is driven based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300. Let

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), it is for payout control. In the microcomputer 21TM370, the data on the number of unpaid pieces stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is not cleared (because there are remaining game media to be paid out), The payout motor 21TM 289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM 302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370, and single payout is carried out until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. Carry out the work. As a result, the occurrence of a power failure, and subsequent control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming medium being interrupted due to the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a being opened. Disbursement of is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off while the payout of the winning balls is being executed and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power recovery, or again. On the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, the payout of the interrupted gaming media is resumed, and the payout of the winning balls is realized. It is possible to complete the

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the data on the number of unpaid pieces stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game media to be paid out is ), The dispensing motor 21TM 289 is not driven, and the dispensing operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not yet formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Data on the number of unpaid pieces stored in the number-of-payouts storage buffer is initialized. As described above, since the data on the number of unpaid pieces is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode before the power is cut off. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing which has been executed before (i.e., the number of payouts designated from the gaming control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), it has not been paid yet. No payment is made for the number of pieces paid out.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure during the execution of the prize ball processing, the number of unpaid pieces stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is stored. Data on the number of unpaid pieces will be stored in the buffer. Here, since the data on the number of unpaid pieces is cleared by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the forced withdrawal (cancelled) is performed without resuming the interrupted payout. That is, at the time of power recovery, during the time when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout for the number of unpaid pieces is not performed.

(Modification example for winning ball processing (transition to setting change mode) when power interruption occurs)
Next, with regard to processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power supply while the payout of the prize ball is being executed, and control is made in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, see FIG. It demonstrates concretely using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, whereby the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized, and when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM 302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-13, when the power is cut off while the payout of the game medium is being executed, the payout being executed is stopped, and when it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, After the completion of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without restarting the dispensing, the dispensing is resumed based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM 302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 is not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 10-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Receive a connection OK command as. When receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits again the connection confirmation command as the winning ball request signal after 1s (one second) has elapsed from the time of reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 repeatedly execute the communication process of the connection confirmation as described above.

  When there is a winning when there is no communication processing of connection confirmation (from the reception of a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal to the transmission of a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls as a winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 receives the prize ball count command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball count command. When the power is cut off during the payout period of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, the game Suspend the delivery of media. At this time, data on the number of unpaid pieces is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM 302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370.

  Here, the store clerk at the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (to further initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. Also, the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, on the main substrate 11, when power supply from the predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from the predetermined power source board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 causes the gaming machine frame 3 to be opened. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is open.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in the stop state. As a result, after power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing predetermined processing to be power on processing is controlled (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is controlled, and serial communication circuit setting processing shown in FIG. 10-1 (step S21TM1480). Since the driving of the payout motor 21TM 289 is stopped), the game media payout is maintained even if the data on the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared. It will be.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, and the processing after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. When the RAM clear process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear is executed. Further, in the present example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is operated at the time of power on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 The data of the number of unpaid pieces stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM 302 is erased (cleared).

  The connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. I do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the dispensing motor 21TM 289 is driven to perform the dispensing operation on the condition that the loading motor 21 TM 289 is not set.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is being controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. No payout of gaming media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is in the ON state, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM 289, the winning ball processing is not performed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game arcade usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480), the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. It may be in an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state. Based on the above, the drive of the dispensing motor 21TM289 is stopped.

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the gaming machine frame and the door frame open. Driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is started based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 does not detect any open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM 302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM 052 a is not operated when the power is turned on) ) When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on))) Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the data on the number of unpaid pieces stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. (Due to the presence of the remaining game media to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM 289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid quantity storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM 302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM 370, The dispensing operation is performed one by one until the data becomes 0. As a result, the occurrence of a power failure, and subsequent control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming medium being interrupted due to the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a being opened. Disbursement of is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off while the payout of the winning balls is being executed and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power recovery, or again. On the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, the payout of the interrupted gaming media is resumed, and the payout of the winning balls is realized. It is possible to complete the

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 backs up the RAM 21TM302. Since the data on the number of unpaid pieces stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there are no remaining game media to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, and the payout is made. Do not work.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. I will not. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) targeted for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed by operating the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main substrate 11, the payout is made. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the data of the number of unpaid pieces stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is It is not initialized. As described above, whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for the game control microcomputer 100) is executed regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. Regardless of), if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data on the number of unpaid pieces is not initialized, and it is executed before the occurrence of a power failure (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode with power restoration) Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing (ie, the number of payouts designated from the gaming control microcomputer 100, eg, 14), the number of unpaid payouts not paid out , Will be executed.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure during the execution of the prize ball processing, the number of unpaid pieces stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is stored. Data on the number of unpaid pieces will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main substrate 11 is operated when the power is turned on, the data on the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared and maintained unless the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is operated. Therefore, the suspended payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of gaming media is completed. That is, after restoration of the power, a period corresponding to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is passed, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the payout for the number of unpaid pieces is executed.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (a detection signal of the open state is inputted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). Not limited to such a mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main substrate 11 (a detection signal of the open state may be input to the gaming control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM 300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Even if it detects a winning, it does not transmit the winning ball number command. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the winning balls number command has not been received, so that the winning balls are not paid out.

(Output period of security signal and setting change response signal)
As described above, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. As described above, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that the initialization process (RAM clear), the detection of an unauthorized action, the detection of a game suspension target error, and the like are performed by the security signal. Also, the security signal is processed from the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 10-1 and FIG. From step S21TM 3510, shown in 10-2, it becomes ON state in the period from when it is determined NO in step S21TM 3060 or step S21TM 3070 and normal game processing is executed).

  Further, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is processed from the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode to the normal game processing after processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended (for example, FIG. 10-1 and FIG. 10). From step S21TM 3510, shown in 10-2, it becomes ON state in the period from when it is determined NO in step S21TM 3060 or step S21TM 3070 and normal game processing is executed). It is possible to externally notify that the process related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been performed (that the process related to the change of the setting value or the confirmation has been performed) by the setting change corresponding signal. In addition, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended (when transitioning to the normal game processing), the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and thereafter the same terminal is used to Since the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (1), when transitioning to the setting change mode involving RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) at power on, A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change mode ends and the processing shifts to the normal game processing. Also, with the end of the setting change mode (specifically, at a timing 50 ms after the setting change mode is ended and transition to the normal game processing), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF, Based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 2, 2 pulses are output as the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) was executed when the power was turned on, but did not shift to the setting change mode In this case, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change handling signal is not turned on.

  Thus, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal is not executed, at least the input of the security signal is not input. It is possible to recognize that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled.

  As shown in Figs. 10-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal turns ON when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended. (To be precise, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended and 50 ms have passed since the transition to the normal game processing) and the state becomes OFF. The security signal is also turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but as shown in FIG. 10-15 (3), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed. In this case, the setting change mode is not immediately turned off after the end of the setting change mode, and the ON state is continued for 30 seconds after the setting change mode is ended. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, when the setting confirmation mode ends (precisely, the setting confirmation mode ends) And the game is turned off at a timing 50 ms after shifting to the normal game processing.

  Also, in any of the cases shown in FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), although the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (accurately, the setting change After the mode or setting confirmation mode ends and it shifts to the normal game processing and it becomes an OFF state at the time when 50 ms has elapsed, then (for example, after 50 ms or more has elapsed), storing the setting value of the RAM 102 Based on the fact that the setting value stored in the area is 2, 2 pulses are output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode. This makes it possible to easily specify the setting value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the setting change mode is not entered, the security signal indicates that the power is turned on (RAM It becomes ON state for 30 seconds from the time of clear execution).

  Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, although the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, it does not shift to the setting change mode It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, when the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be entered (in particular, the setting change mode involving the clear of the RAM is likely to be entered). If the security signal input period does not reach 30 seconds, it may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). It can be recognized that there is a possibility that only the confirmation has been made without being able to change the setting value.

  In other words, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, it may be that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) was executed but it may not have shifted to the setting change mode. When the security device can be recognized and the input period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, there may be a transition to the setting confirmation mode without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) If the management device can recognize that there is a possibility that only confirmation has been made without being able to change the setting value, and the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds. , May have transitioned to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode (Especially, it is likely that the transition to the setting change mode with RAM clear) and is recognizable in the management device. As described above, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the external side by the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal is not executed, at least the input of the security signal is not input. It is possible to distinguish and recognize the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, since the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, the RAM clear is always executed (step S21TM3050). Or step S21TM3150). As a result, the output period of the security signal is about +30 seconds of the period controlled in the setting change mode. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is off when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570). The RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed. As a result, the output period of the security signal is a period controlled to the setting confirmation mode (more precisely, a period about 50 ms controlled to the setting confirmation mode).

  As described above, since the output period of the security signal is different between when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, each gaming machine changes the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish and specify whether the mode has been controlled or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned ON when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended (precisely, the setting change mode). Alternatively, when the setting confirmation mode is ended and 50 ms have elapsed since the transition to the normal game processing, the camera is turned off. Therefore, on the external device side, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change corresponding signal. Also, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds longer than the setting change corresponding signal input period, it is recognized that the setting change mode has been controlled and that the RAM clear has been executed. If it is possible and the input period of the setting change corresponding signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it can be recognized that the setting confirmation mode without clearing the RAM is controlled.

  As described above, by outputting the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal from different output terminals, on the external device side where these signals are input, a predetermined event (RAM clear in this example) in the gaming machine. Can be identified by distinguishing between the occurrence of the event and the fact that the gaming machine has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Then, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly specified, and it can be specified based on the input period of the security signal as to which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Next, on the basis of the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on, the setting is confirmed without clearing the RAM (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). The setting confirmation mode ends because the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in less than 50 ms after the mode has entered the mode and the setting confirmation mode has been started (for example, since the setting changing flag has been set in step S21TM3510). Then, it is assumed that the processing has shifted to the normal game processing.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (5), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. And, less than 50 ms after the setting confirmation mode is started, the setting confirmation mode is ended (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF), and even when it is shifted to the normal game processing, a period of at least 50 ms or more, The setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, with regard to the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal, once turned ON, the ON state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

  Assuming that the period in which the setting change response signal and the security signal are in the ON state is less than a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change mode or setting confirmation on the external device side such as a hall computer. It will be difficult to recognize the transition to the mode. As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned ON at least for a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), The external device side can recognize that each pachinko gaming machine 1 has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In addition, regarding the setting change corresponding signal, the setting change corresponding signal is output in a special mode with a pulse width of 100 ms after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, so that an external device such as a hall computer etc. The set values of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. Temporarily, according to the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode being less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is turned ON and then switched to the OFF state in less than 50 ms, and thereafter, the set value When the number of pulses of 100 ms width corresponding to the setting value stored in the storage area is output, a period (less than 50 ms) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in the external device Can not recognize the setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the above, and recognizes only the setting change corresponding signal of the special aspect (pulse width is 100 ms) which is output after that, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mistaken. May be recognized. As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the external device side is set by turning on the setting change corresponding signal at least for a predetermined period (50 ms in this example). Then, the setting value of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be specified accurately.

  10-16 is a figure which shows the other example regarding the presentation apparatus with which the presentation control board 12 is provided. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 2, in addition to the game effect lamp 9, the lamp control board 14 has an out-of-screen first hold indicator 21 TM 101, an out-of-screen second hold indicator 21 TM 102, and a fourth symbol indicator The 21TM 103 and the setting change status indicator 21TM 104 are connected, and each of them is configured by a light emitting device such as an LED. Further, all of these light emitting devices are provided outside the screen frame of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of these light emitting devices via the lamp control board 14. In this example, all of these light emitting devices emit light with a common emission color.

  The out-of-screen first hold display 21TM101 is configured of two light emitting devices. When there is a change in the first reserved storage number, that is, when a winning on the first starting winning opening has occurred (when the first reserved storage number has increased), the effect control CPU 120 produces the first special symbol. The first hold memory number specifying the updated first hold memory number from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of is completed and the display result is determined (when the first hold memory number decreases). When the designation command is received, the first out-of-screen display 21 TM 101 is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the first number of pending storages designated by the first number of pending storages designation command.

  For example, when the first pending storage number designated by the first pending storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. Further, when the first number of pending storages designated by the first number of pending storages designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. When the first number of pending storages designated by the first pending storage number designation command is 3, one of the light emitting devices is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned on. Then, when the first number of pending storages designated by the first number of pending storages designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are caused to blink.

  The out-of-screen second hold display 21TM102 is configured of two light emitting devices. When there is a change in the second reserved storage number, that is, when a winning on the second starting winning opening has occurred (when the second reserved storage number has increased), the effect control CPU 120 produces the second special symbol. The second hold memory number specifying the updated second hold memory number from the gaming control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of is finished and the display result is determined (when the second hold memory number decreases). When the designation command is received, the second out-of-screen hold indicator 21 TM 102 is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the second hold storage number designated by the second hold storage number designation command.

  For example, when the second pending storage number designated by the second pending storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. When the second number of pending storages designated by the second pending storage number designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. When the second number of pending storages designated by the second pending storage number designation command is 3, one of the light emitting devices is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned on. Then, when the second number of pending storages designated by the second pending storage number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are caused to blink.

  The fourth symbol display 21TM103 is composed of two light emitting devices. Here, one light emitting device is a variation display device of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A on the main substrate 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol is started (that is, The variable display is started, and at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the display is turned off or lit (that is, the variable display is ended), and the display result is derived. The other light emitting device is a variation display device of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B on the main substrate 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started (that is, variation At the timing when the display of the second special symbol starts, the display turns off or lights up (i.e., the display of the variable ends), and the display result is derived.

  When variation display of the first special symbol is started, the effect control CPU 120 is a first hold storage number subtraction designation command for specifying that the first hold storage number has been subtracted, and a display result designation for specifying a display result. That the first special symbol variation display is executed based on the reception of a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100 such as a command and a variation pattern command specifying a variation time of the special symbol. And, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol can be specified. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is finished and the display result is determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first special symbol based on the fact that the symbol determination designation command is received from the gaming control microcomputer 100. It is possible to identify that the display result has been derived by ending the variable display of.

  Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set of commands accompanied by the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the one light emitting device in the fourth symbol display 21TM 103 blinks (that is, variation display). Is started, and when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed, one of the light emitting devices is turned off or turned on (ie, the display result is fixed) in response to the reception of the symbol determination designation command. ). For example, when the display result of "off" is designated by the display result designation command, one of the light emitting devices is turned off in the symbol determination period, and the display result of "big hit" is designated by the display result designation command. In this case, one of the light emitting devices is turned on in the symbol determination period.

  When variation display of the second special symbol is started, the CPU 120 for effect control specifies a second hold storage number subtraction designation command that specifies that the second hold storage number has been subtracted, and a display result designation that specifies the display result. The second special symbol variable display is executed based on the reception of a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100 such as a command and a variation pattern command specifying a special symbol variation time, And, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be specified. Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is finished and the display result is determined, the effect control CPU 120 selects the second special symbol based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command from the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to identify that the display result has been derived by ending the variable display of.

  Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set of commands accompanied by the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the other light emitting device blinks on the fourth symbol display 21TM 103 (ie, variation display). Is started, and when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed, the other light emitting device is turned off or turned on (that is, the display result is determined) in response to the reception of the symbol determination designation command. ). For example, when the display result of "off" is designated by the display result designation command, the other light emitting device is turned off in the symbol determination period, and the display result of "big hit" is designated by the display result designation command. In this case, the other light emitting device is turned on in the symbol determination period.

  The light emission color of the first out-of-screen display 21TM101 and the light emission color of the second out-of-screen display 21TM102 may be made different, for example, the former is emitted in blue and the latter is emitted in red. You may make it Further, in the fourth symbol display device 21TM103, the light emission color of one light emitting device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A is made different from the light emission color of the other light emitting device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, the former may emit light in blue (the same emission color as the first off-screen display 21TM101) and the latter may emit light in red (the same emission color as the off-screen second display 21TM102) You may do so.

  In addition, an image indicating the first pending storage number (for example, an image of blue numbers “0 to 4”), and an image indicating the second pending storage number (for example, an image of red numbers “0 to 4”) It may be displayed on the display device 5. In addition, the image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (for example, the image of a quadrilateral, and the first special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed in white during blinking display (variation), and the display result is out of order) The image is displayed stopped in blue in the symbol determination period, and the image stopped and displayed in red in the symbol determination period if the display result is a big hit), and the image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (for example, a square The second special symbol is displayed in yellow while it is blinking (varying), and when the display result is out of display, it is stopped and displayed in blue in the symbol determination period, and the display result is a big hit In this case, the image displayed in red in the symbol determination period may be displayed on the image display device 5).

  The setting change status indicator 21TM104 is configured of one light emitting device. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting change state at the timing when the setting change mode command (see step S21TM 3585 in FIG. 10B) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when controlled to the setting change mode is received. The lamp 21TM104. Then, the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is turned off at the timing when the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 10B) transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting change mode is finished is received. Do.

  The effect control CPU 120 changes the setting at the timing when the setting confirmation mode command (see step S21TM3580 in FIG. 10B) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when controlled to the setting confirmation mode is received. The status indicator 21TM 104 blinks. Then, the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is turned off at the timing when the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 10B) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting confirmation mode is finished is received. Do.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode is controlled (lighting state) and that the setting confirmation mode is controlled (flashing state) by the light emission mode of the setting change state indicator 21TM104. It has become. Here, in comparison with a period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the image display control in the image display device 5 becomes possible by the display control unit 123, the light emission of each light emitting device is performed by the lamp control board 14 after the power is turned on. The period until control becomes possible is extremely short. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-17, in the image display device 5, a period during which it can not be notified that the setting change mode is being controlled and the setting confirmation mode is being controlled (image by the display control unit 123 Even when it is a period before display control becomes possible, it is informed that control is being performed in the setting change mode and control is being performed in the setting confirmation mode according to the light emission mode of the setting change status indicator 21TM104. It becomes possible.

  The effect control board 12 side is not limited to the setting change state indicator 21TM104, but the first out-of-screen suspension indicator 21TM101, the out-of-screen second suspension indicator 21TM102, and the fourth symbol indicator 21TM103 are played By emitting light with a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern at the time of lighting, it may be notified that the setting change mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. For example, it is controlled in the setting change mode by setting all the LEDs constituting the first off-screen display 21TM101, the second off-screen display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 to a lighting state. The setting confirmation mode is controlled by setting all the LEDs constituting the out-of-screen first holding indicator 21TM101, the out-of-screen second holding indicator 21TM102, and the fourth symbol indicator 21TM103 to a blinking state. May be notified.

  On the other hand, on the main substrate 11 side, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the common view hold indicator 25C, and the first special symbol during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled. The display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when playing a game (for example, all are simultaneously turned on) ) To notify that the setting change mode is being controlled. In addition, during the time when the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the CPU 103 displays the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general drawing hold indicator 25C, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second The special symbol display device 4B and the normal symbol display 20 are caused to emit light with a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when playing a game (and a light emission pattern different even when being controlled to the setting change mode) (For example, by setting all in a blinking state at the same time), it can be informed that the setting confirmation mode is being controlled.

[Description of Feature 30TM]
The features 30TM will now be described. FIG. 11A is an explanatory view of a specific example of the hold display and the active display. On the screen of the image display 5, a first hold display area 30TM 101 for displaying a first hold memory number (0 to 4 first hold display 30TM 001), and a second hold memory number (0 to 4 second hold) A second reserved display area 30TM102 for displaying the display 30TM002) and an active display area 30TM103 for displaying an active display 30TM003 corresponding to the currently-executed variable display are provided. The first hold display area 30TM101, the second hold display area 30TM102, and the active display area 30TM103 are provided at the lower part of the screen, and the left side is the first hold display area 30TM101 when viewed from the player centering on the active display area 30TM103. The right side is the second hold display area 30TM102.

  When the first hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays, on the first hold display area 30TM 101, the first hold displays 30TM 001 corresponding to the first hold storage number. That is, in the first hold display 30TM001, the start condition (for example, winning to the first start winning opening) is satisfied but the start condition (for example, the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, and is controlled to the big hit gaming state Information corresponding to the fluctuation display (and the fluctuation display of the decoration pattern) of the first special symbol which is not, and that the number of the second holding memory is 0 and the number of the first holding memory is not 0) It is. When a plurality of first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, they correspond to the first hold display 30TM001 in the order closer to the active display area 30TM103 (from the right of the player as viewed from the player) The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

  Further, when the second hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays, on the second hold display area 30TM 102, the second hold displays 30TM002 corresponding to the second hold storage number. That is, in the second hold display 30TM002, the start condition (for example, winning to the second start winning opening) is satisfied but the start condition (for example, the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, and is controlled to the big hit gaming state It is the information corresponding to the fluctuation display (and the fluctuation display of the decoration pattern) of the 2nd special symbol which is not and that the 2nd reservation memory number is not 0) being established. When a plurality of second hold displays 30TM002 are displayed in the second hold display area 30TM102, the second hold display 30TM002 corresponds to the second hold display 30TM002 in the order closer to the active display area 30TM103 (from the left when viewed from the player) The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 30TM003 in the active display area 30TM103 when the variation display of the decorative pattern is being executed. That is, after the start condition (for example, the winning of the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is established, the active display 30TM003 does not have the start condition (for example, the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, and the big hit game It is information corresponding to the fluctuation display (and the fluctuation display of the decoration pattern) of the special symbol in which it is not controlled by the state and that the number of pending storages is not 0 is established.

  In the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 (left side as viewed from the player), an area different from the first hold display area 30TM101 is displayed. A sub-hold display area 30TM104 to be displayed and a sub-active display area 30TM105 different from the active display area 30TM103 and displaying a sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the currently-displayed variable display are provided.

  In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the CPU 120 for effect control determines to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 at the start-up winning (when the first start winning opening occurs), the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is selected. While displaying the number of sub-hold displays 30TM004 corresponding to the number of one-hold storage, the sub-active display area 30TM105 displays the sub-active display 30TM005. That is, in the sub hold display 30TM 004, the start condition (for example, winning for the first start winning opening) is satisfied but the start condition (for example, the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, and is controlled to the big hit gaming state It is the information corresponding to the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol which the second number of pending storages is 0, and the 1st number of pending storages is not 0) is not established. In addition, after the start condition (for example, winning a prize on the first start winning opening) is satisfied, the sub active display 30TM005 is not controlled to the start condition (for example, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, and is controlled to the big hit gaming state) It is information corresponding to the fluctuation display (and the fluctuation display of the decoration pattern) of the first special symbol in which the second held memory number is 0 and the first held memory number is not 0). When a plurality of sub hold displays 30TM004 are displayed in the sub hold display area 30TM104, the variation corresponding to the sub hold display 30TM004 in the order closer to the sub active display area 30TM105 (from the right when viewed from the player) The display start condition is satisfied.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11A, the secondary retention display 30TM004 is a star-shaped contour, and is a contour different from the first retention display 30TM001 (round display or triangular display). Since the size of the secondary hold display 30TM004 is smaller than the size of the first hold display 30TM001, the secondary hold display 30TM004 is less noticeable and the visibility for the player is low. Further, the secondary active display 30TM005 is also a star-shaped outline, and is an outline different from the active display 30TM003 (round display or triangular display). The sub active display 30TM005 is less noticeable than the active display 30TM003 because the size thereof is small, and the visibility for the player is low.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the active display 30TM 003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM 103 in response to the variable display of the decorative pattern on the left, middle and right on the image display device 5 and the sub-active The sub active display 30TM005 is displayed in the display area 30TM105. As described above, as information corresponding to the one variable display (common variable display) being executed, information in different modes of the active display 30TM003 and the sub active display 30TM005 is displayed. That is, the active display 30TM003 and the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display corresponding to the active display 30TM003 and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed on the screen.

  Further, in response to the first number of pending storages being four, four first pending displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first pending display area 30TM101, and four secondary pending displays in the secondary pending display area 30TM104. 30TM 004 is displayed. As described above, as the information corresponding to each of the four variable displays which have not been executed yet, information of different modes of the first hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed. That is, the first pending display 30TM001 of 1, the variable display (pending storage) corresponding to the first pending display 30TM001, and the one secondary pending display 30TM004 corresponding to the shared variable display (pending storage) at the same time It will be displayed on the screen.

  In this way, a plurality of types of hold displays (first hold display 30TM001, sub hold display 30TM004) corresponding to the common change display (the change display of the first special symbol) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen, Interesting effects can be improved by diversifying the effects using the hold display. Similarly, a plurality of types of active displays (active display 30TM003, auxiliary active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display (the first special symbol fluctuation display and the decoration symbol fluctuation display) being executed are simultaneously displayed on the same screen. This makes it possible to diversify the effects using the active display and improve the interest.

  Here, as described later, when it is determined not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the determination at the start winning, while the first-hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, The sub hold display 30TM 004 is not displayed in the sub hold display area 30TM104. In addition, while active display 30TM003 is displayed in active display area 30TM103, sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in sub-active display area 30TM105, and further, sub-active display 30TM005 is an area to be displayed. Information (a square frame shown at the top of the screen in FIG. 11A) will not be displayed either.

  In this embodiment, as described later, it is possible to execute the first change presentation and / or the second change presentation based on the determination result at the start winning combination. The first change effect is a special mode that differs from the normal mode (in this example, the white round display in this example) the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the start winning combination. (In this example, white triangle display), blue mode (in this example, blue round display), green mode (in this example, green round display), red mode (in this example, red round shape) It is a notice effect to be displayed in the display mode) or in a golden mode (in this example, a golden round mode display). In addition, the second change effect is different from the normal mode (in this example, the white star display in this example) the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the start winning combination. This is a notice effect displayed in a blue mode (in this example, a blue star display) or in a red mode (in this example, a red star display).

  FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart of the change effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect determination process in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process shown in FIG.

  In the change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a set of start winning command (for example, a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and It is checked whether 1 pending storage number addition designation command has been newly received (step S30TM1010).

  The symbol designating command is an effect control command indicating whether or not to be a big hit among the determination results at the time of winning, and a determination result of the type of the big hit. The CPU 103 determines whether or not to be a big hit and the big hit type in the case of a big hit based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number extracted at the start winning combination, and designates the determination result Output the specified command. Further, the fluctuation category command is an effect control command indicating the judgment result of the fluctuation pattern among the judgment results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines, based on the variation pattern type determination random numbers extracted at the start winning combination, whether or not to become normal reach, whether to become super reach, etc., and outputs a variation category command specifying the determination result. Do. Further, the first pending storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first pending storage number has increased by one.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a set of symbol designation command, variation category command, and first pending storage number addition designation command) is newly stored in the start winning command storage area. Do. If one set of start winning combination commands has not been newly received (NO in step S30TM1010), the process ends.

  If one set of start winning combination commands has been newly received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S30TM1020). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends. As described later, the change prohibition flag is set based on the fact that at least the first change effect is determined to be performed. If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends.

  If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S30TM1020), the CPU 120 for effect control determines the presence / absence and the final display mode of the first change effect, and the presence / absence of the second change effect and the final display mode described later. It determines based on a display mode determination table (refer FIG. 11-3) (step S30 TM1030).

  By performing the processing of step S30TM1010 and step S30TM1020, in this embodiment, the processing of step S30TM1030 and subsequent steps is executed only when the first change presentation is not performed, and the first change presentation is performed. Or it is comprised possible to perform the 2nd change production.

  FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory view of a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), in this embodiment, as a final display mode of the active display 30TM003, “normal mode”, “special mode”, “blue mode”, “green mode”, “red mode” And "golden aspect" can be determined, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these aspects. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), in this embodiment, as a final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005, "no display", "normal mode", "blue mode", and "red mode" It is possible to determine any of the above, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these aspects. Among these, "no display" indicates that the secondary hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the secondary hold display area 30TM104 and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105.

  As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), when the determination result at the start winning combination is "off" (ie, when the determination result designated by the symbol specifying command is "off"), the start winning combination The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first reserve storage) becomes the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 31% and the special mode (white at a rate of 4% It becomes a triangle aspect at a ratio of 18%, becomes a blue aspect (blue round indication), becomes a green aspect at a percentage of 21% (green round indication), a red aspect at a percentage of 16% (red round indication) 10% of the golden aspect (golden round display). That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display which is the determination target at the start winning combination is different from the normal mode (white circular display) is 69 It will be executed at a rate of%.

  On the other hand, when the determination result at the start winning combination is "big hit" (ie, when the determination result designated by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), it is based on the start winning combination (new first hold storage). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 2%, a special mode at a rate of 3%, a blue mode at a rate of 15%, and a green mode at a rate of 20% It becomes a red aspect at a rate of 25% and a golden aspect at a rate of 35%. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display which is the determination target at the start winning combination is different from the normal mode is executed at a rate of 98% It will be.

  As described above, when the first change effect is executed, the ratio of the big hit is high as compared with the case where the first change effect is not executed. Further, when the first change effect is executed, the ratio of the big hit becomes the highest when the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 becomes a gold mode. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), regarding the display mode of the active display 30TM003, the expectation of becoming a big hit is in the relationship of the normal mode <special mode <blue mode <green mode <red mode <gold mode .

  In addition, as shown in the change pattern of the first change effect described later, at the stage of the first hold display 30TM001 before the active display 30TM003, the display mode is a special mode different from the normal mode, a blue mode, or a red mode It may be Then, when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (when displayed as the active display 30TM003), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift, or a display mode having a higher degree of expectation than that. Is supposed to change. Therefore, with regard to the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001, the expectation of becoming a big hit is in the relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <red mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the rate at which the special mode is selected as the final display mode of the active display is extremely lower than the rate at which the other modes are selected. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5 described later, the rate at which the change pattern of the reserve display includes the special mode is not so low as compared with the rate at which the other modes are included. Therefore, when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode, the rate at which the display mode changes is higher than in the case where it is displayed in another mode. When the first hold display 30TM 001 is displayed in a special mode, the player can not expect much jackpot as compared to when displayed in a blue mode or a red mode, but the display mode is more highly expected. It can be expected to change to the display mode (blue mode, red mode).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), when the determination result at the start winning combination is “off” (ie, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is “off”) The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning combination (new first hold storage) are not displayed at a rate of 70% but are displayed at a rate of 30%. The proportion in which the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, and the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary display 30TM004) is displayed and The rate at which the final display mode is the blue mode (blue star display) is 4%, the secondary active display 30TM005 (the secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). The percentage is 1%. That is, the information corresponding to the variable display as the determination target at the start winning combination (pending display or active display) is displayed at a rate of 30%, and corresponds to the variable display as the determination target at the start winning combination The 2nd change presentation which makes the mode of the information (pending display or active display) different from a normal mode (white star-shaped display) will be performed at a rate of 5%.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), when the determination result at the start winning is "big hit" (ie, the determination result designated by the symbol specifying command is "big hit"), The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning combination (new first hold storage) are not displayed at a rate of 40% but are displayed at a rate of 60%. The proportion in which the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, and the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary display 30TM004) is displayed and The rate at which the final display mode is the blue mode (blue star display) is 10%, the secondary active display 30TM005 (the secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). The percentage is 25%. That is, the information corresponding to the variable display as the determination target at the start winning combination (hold display or active display) is displayed at a rate of 60%, and corresponds to the variable display as the determination target at the start winning combination The 2nd change presentation which makes an aspect of carried out information (pending indication or active indication) an aspect different from a usual aspect (white star-shaped indication) will be performed at a rate of 50%.

  As described above, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, the percentage of a big hit is higher than when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed. In addition, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of a big hit is higher than when the second change effect is not executed. In addition, when the second change effect is executed, if the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 becomes a red mode, the ratio of the big hit becomes the highest. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), with regard to the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005, the degree of expectation of being a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Also, as shown in the change pattern of the second change effect described later, when the display mode becomes a blue mode or a red mode different from the normal mode at the stage of the sub hold display 30TM 004 prior to the sub active display 30TM 005 There is. When the sub hold display 30TM004 is shifted to the sub active display area 30TM105 (when displayed as the sub active display 30TM005), at least the display mode is the same as before the active shift, or a display with a higher expectation than that. It is supposed to change to the aspect. Therefore, with regard to the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004, the expectation of being a big hit is usually in the relationship of the mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Here, in the process of step S30TM1030, the CPU for effect control 120 determines (1) to execute the first change effect (make the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 different from the normal mode), and It may be decided to execute the change effect (display the sub hold display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005 and make the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 different from the normal mode).

  Also, the effect control CPU 120 may decide to execute the (2-1) first change effect, and may decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. In addition, (2-2) It decides to execute the first change effect, but does not execute the second change effect of the sub hold display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005 but displays the second display effect of the sub active display 30TM005 It may be decided to be an aspect).

  Further, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that (3) the first change effect is not performed (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is the normal mode), and executes the second change effect (sub hold display 30TM004 and It may be determined that the secondary active display 30TM005 is displayed and the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 is a mode different from the normal mode.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 may decide not to execute the (4-1) first change effect, and may decide not to display the sub hold display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005. Also, (4-2) It is decided not to execute the first change presentation, and the second change presentation of the sub hold display 30TM 004 and the sub active display 30 TM 005 is not performed (the final display mode of the sub active display 30 TM 005 is usually It may be decided to be an aspect).

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute either the first change effect or the second change effect in the process of step S30TM1030 (NO in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (4-1) and When it corresponds to any of 4-2), the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning combination (the first hold storage) is displayed in the normal mode. The first suspension display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning combination (the first suspension storage) does not change from the normal mode to another mode, and even after the variable display corresponding to the first suspension storage is started, Does not change from the normal mode to the other mode (change patterns 101, 201 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5). 301, 401).

  In addition, when it corresponds to the above (4-2), although the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning combination (the first suspension storage) is displayed, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the other mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending storage is started, the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding thereto does not change from the normal mode to the other mode (shown in FIG. 11-6). (Refer to change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

  If the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (1), (2-1) and (2) -2) and either of (3), as shown below, the change pattern of a change production is determined.

  When it is determined to execute both the first change presentation and the second change presentation (YES in step S30TM1050), that is, in the case of (1) above, the first after the update in step S30TM1060 The change pattern of the first change presentation is determined based on the number of pending storages (the number of first pending storages after receiving the first pending storage number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined active display 30TM003 ( 11-4 and 11-5), the number of the first pending storage after update (the number of first pending storages after receiving the first pending storage number addition designation command), and the determined secondary active display 30TM005 The change pattern of the second change effect is determined based on the final display mode of (see FIG. 11-6).

  If the effect control CPU 120 executes the first change effect and decides not to execute the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1110), that is, the above (2-1) and (2-2) If any of the above applies, in step S30TM1120, the first number of pending storages after update (the number of first pending storages after receiving the first pending storage number addition designation command) and the final of the determined active display 30TM003 The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the display mode (see FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5). In addition, when it corresponds to the above (2-2), although the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning combination (the first suspension storage) is displayed, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the other mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending storage is started, the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding thereto does not change from the normal mode to the other mode (shown in FIG. 11-6). (Refer to change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the first change effect but to execute the second change effect (NO in step S30TM1110), that is, if it corresponds to the above (3), the step In S30TM1210, based on the updated first pending storage number (the first pending storage number after receiving the first pending storage number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined secondary active display 30TM005, The change pattern of the change presentation is determined (see FIG. 11-6).

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (any of the above (1), (2-1), (2-2), and (3) If the answer is yes, the prefetch counter is set (step S30TM1070, step S30TM1130, step S30TM1220). It should be noted that although the first change effect and the second change effect are neither executed but the sub hold display 30TM 004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) is displayed (above (4-2) If applicable, also set the read ahead counter.

  A value corresponding to the first pending storage number updated based on the start winning combination (a value designated by the first pending storage number designating command) is set in the pre-reading counter, and variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The value of the prefetch counter is decremented by one each time (every time the first pending storage number subtraction designation command is received). That is, each time the first hold display 30TM001 or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the hold storage that is the determination target at the start winning combination is shifted, the value of the prefetch counter is subtracted. And when the value of the pre-reading counter becomes 0, the fluctuation display which became the target of the first change effect and / or the second change effect (or the second hold effect 30TM 004 is displayed although the second change effect is not executed) Variable display will be performed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets a change prohibition flag (step S30TM1080, step S30TM1140). During the period when the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new start winning combination has occurred, it is determined that the above-mentioned step S30TM1020 is YES, thereby corresponding to the new starting winning combination (new first hold storage) The first change presentation and the second change presentation are not executed, and the sub hold display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005 corresponding to the new start winning combination (new first hold storage) are not displayed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the variable display targeted for the first change presentation ends.

  11-4 and 11-5 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the first change effect. When the first hold storage number is n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the n-th first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 Timing (starting winning timing), (ii) the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to a higher position (active display area 30TM103 side) in the first pending display area 30TM101 Timing (when n 2 2), and (iii) timing at which the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning combination shifts to the active display area 30TM103 (timing when the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning combination is displayed ), Display information corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning combination (pending display or Active display) might be displayed in a different manner from the normal manner.

  In FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, what is the display information (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display at each timing (i) to (iii) for each change pattern It shows whether it becomes a display mode. In the change patterns shown in FIG. 11-4 and FIG. 11-5, “normal” indicates a normal mode that is a white round display, and “special” indicates a special mode that is a white triangular display. “Blue” indicates a blue aspect that is a blue round display, and “red” indicates a red aspect that is a red round display.

  If the first hold storage count stored in the first hold storage count storage area is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one hold shown in FIG. 11-4 (A). Select a table

  For the case where the final display mode determined is the normal mode, the probability of 100% of the change pattern 101 is determined regardless of the determination result at the starting winning combination (display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit) Judgment values are assigned as determined by. The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the advance target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift after the first hold display of the advance target is displayed in the normal mode at the start winning combination.

  In the description of FIG. 11-4 and FIG. 11-5, “active shift” means that the first hold display 30TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 (as a result, at the start winning prize) Active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display to be determined is displayed.

  Here, the normal mode is determined as the final display mode, and in the case of the normal mode at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change pattern 101, change pattern 201 described later, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401). After the active shift, the active indication 30TM003 does not change in the normal mode.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the special mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Also, determination values are assigned to the change patterns 103, respectively. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the active shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target at the start winning combination in the normal mode. After the first hold display of the advance notice is displayed in the special mode at the start winning, the first hold display of the advance target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is selected at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201 described later, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401). After the active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will change from the normal mode to the special mode finally. Further, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402) ) After the active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will not change in the special mode.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form at the timing of the active shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target at the start winning combination in a special mode. After the first hold display of the advance notice is displayed in blue mode at the start winning, it is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the advance notice in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and in the case of the normal mode at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201 described later, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401). After an active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the blue mode. In the case where the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is selected at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402) ) After the active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will eventually change from the special aspect to the blue aspect. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is selected at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change pattern 403) And 404), after the active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will not change in the blue mode.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the green mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively.

  Here, the green mode is determined as the final display mode, and in the case of the normal mode at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201 described later, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401). After the active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will change from the normal mode to the green mode finally. Further, in the case where the green mode is determined as the final display mode and it is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, change pattern 402) ) After the active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will eventually change from the special mode to the green mode. In addition, the green mode is determined as the final display mode, and is in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change pattern 403) And 404), after an active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue aspect to the green aspect.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the advance notice is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift after displaying the first hold display of the advance notice in the blue mode at the start winning combination. After the first hold display of the advance notice is displayed in the red mode at the start winning, the first hold display of the advance target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and in the case of the normal mode at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201 described later, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401). After the active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will change from the normal mode to the red mode finally. Further, in the case where the red mode is determined as the final display mode and it is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, change pattern 402) ) After the active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will eventually change from the special mode to the red mode. Further, when the red display is determined as the final display display and the display is in the blue display at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change pattern 403) And 404), after an active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue aspect to the red aspect. Further, when the red display is determined as the final display display and the display is in the red display at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, change pattern 405) In the case of ̃412), after the active shift, the active indication 30TM003 does not change in the red mode.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the gold mode, change pattern 101, change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively.

  Here, the golden mode is determined as the final display mode, and in the case of the normal mode at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201 described later, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401). After the active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will change from the normal mode to the gold mode finally. In the case where the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is selected at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402). ) After the active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will eventually change from the special mode to the golden mode. In addition, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is selected at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change pattern 403) And 404), after an active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue aspect to the gold aspect. In addition, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is selected at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405 described later) In the case of ̃412), after the active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will change from the red aspect to the gold aspect finally.

  If the first number of pending storages stored in the first pending storage number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two retentions shown in FIG. 11-4 (B). Select a table

  For the case where the final display mode determined is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 201 is 100% does not depend on the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit) Judgment values are assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 201, after the first hold display of the advance notice is displayed in the normal mode at the start winning combination, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern which does not change the 1st pending | holding display of advance notice object with a normal mode also at a timing.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is a special mode, change pattern 201, change pattern 202, depending on the determination result at the starting winning combination (display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203 and the change pattern 204, respectively. In the change pattern 202, after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the starting winning combination, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 203 is a change pattern for changing the first hold display of the advance notice target to the special mode at the timing, and the change pattern 203 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target at the start winning combination in the normal mode. The change pattern 204 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed as it is at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display in the special mode, the first hold display of the notice target changes as the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. Without a change pattern remains unchanged at special embodiment the first hold display notice object in the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively. In the change pattern 205, after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning combination, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the first hold shift timing, and at the active shift timing. The change pattern 206 is a change pattern for changing the first hold display of the advance notice object to the blue mode, and the change pattern 206 is a notice pattern at the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the advance notice object in the special mode at the start winning combination. The change pattern 207 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form at the timing of the active shift without changing the first hold display of the object in the special mode. (1) After displaying the pending display in a special mode, change the first pending display of the notice object to the blue mode at the timing of the first pending shift, The change pattern 208 does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the live shift, and the change pattern 208 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the start winning prize, and then holds the first hold. It is a change pattern which does not change the 1st pending | holding display of alerting | reporting object with a blue aspect with the timing of a shift as a blue aspect, and does not change the 1st pending | holding display with alerting target with a blue aspect with an active shift timing.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the green mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Judgment values are assigned to change pattern 203, change pattern 204, change pattern 205, change pattern 206, change pattern 207, change pattern 208, change pattern 209, change pattern 210, change pattern 211, and change pattern 212, respectively. ing. In the change pattern 209, the first hold display of the advance notice is displayed in a special mode at the start winning combination, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the first hold shift timing, and at the active shift timing. The change pattern 210 is a change pattern for changing the first hold display of the advance notice target to the red mode, and the change pattern 210 displays the first hold display of the advance notice target in the blue mode at the start winning combination, and then gives a notice at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 211 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift without changing the first hold display of the object in the blue form. (1) After displaying the pending display in blue mode, change the first pending display of the notice object to red mode at the timing of the first pending shift, The change pattern 212 does not change the first hold display of the advance notice target in the red mode at the timing of the live shift, and the change pattern 212 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the start winning prize, This is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the advance notice target in the red mode at the shift timing, and does not change the first hold display of the advance notice target in the red mode even at the active shift timing.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the gold mode, change pattern 201, change pattern 202, depending on the determination result at the starting winning combination (display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit). Judgment values are assigned to change pattern 203, change pattern 204, change pattern 205, change pattern 206, change pattern 207, change pattern 208, change pattern 209, change pattern 210, change pattern 211, and change pattern 212, respectively. ing.

  If the first number of pending storages stored in the first pending storage number storage area is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three retentions shown in FIG. 11-5 (C). Select a table

  For the case where the final display mode determined is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 301 is 100% does not depend on the determination result at the starting winning combination (display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit) Judgment values are assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 301, after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning combination, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern which does not change the 1st pending | holding display of alerting | reporting object with a normal aspect with the timing of pending | holding shift with a normal aspect, and does not change the 1st pending | holding display of alerting | reporting target with a normal aspect with an active shift timing.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the special mode, the change pattern 301 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit) Judgment values are assigned to 302, respectively. In the change pattern 302, after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning combination, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift It is a change pattern which does not change the 1st pending | holding display of alerting | reporting object with a special aspect with the timing of an active shift, without changing the 1st pending | holding display of alerting | reporting object with a special aspect with timing of.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the change according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol designating command; Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively. In the change pattern 303, after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning combination, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift The change pattern 304 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form at the active shift timing without changing the first hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of After displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold target for the notice at the second hold shift timing. This is a change pattern in which the pending display is changed to the blue mode, and the first pending display of the notice target is not changed as it is in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. In pattern 305, after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in blue mode at the start winning combination, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. It is a change pattern which does not change the 1st pending display of a notice object with a blue mode with the timing of a shift, and does not change the 1st pending display of a notice object with a blue mode with a timing of an active shift.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the green mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the change according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the change according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively. In the change pattern 306, after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning combination, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift The change pattern 307 is to change the first hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of and change the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first pending display in blue in the blue mode, the first pending display for the advance notice is not changed in the blue mode at the first pending shift timing, and the first pending notice in the second pending shift timing It is a change pattern which does not change the pending display in the blue mode but changes the first pending display of the advance notice object in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, After displaying the first hold display for the advance notice in blue mode at the starting winning combination, the second change pattern 308 does not change the first hold display for advance notice in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 309 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the hold shift timing and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed as the red mode at the active shift timing. After displaying the first pending display of the alerting target in blue mode, the first pending display of alerting target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first pending shift, and at the second pending shift timing (1) A change pattern which does not change the pending display in the red mode and does not change the first pending display of the notice object in the red mode even at the timing of the active shift In the change pattern 310, after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in red in the start winning combination, the first hold display of the notice target in red is not changed at the timing of the first hold shift. Also at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the advance notice target is not changed in the red mode, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the active shift timing.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the gold mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the change according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively.

  If the first number of pending storages stored in the first pending storage number storage area is “4”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four retentions shown in FIG. 11-5 (D). Select a table

  For the case where the final display mode determined is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 401 is 100% does not depend on the determination result at the start winning combination (display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit) Judgment values are assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 401, after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning combination, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift. The first pending display of the advance notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the time of the pending shift, and the first pending display of the advance notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the third pending shift timing. It is a change pattern which does not change the 1st pending | holding display of advance notification object in a normal mode.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the special mode, the change pattern 401 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit) Judgment values are assigned to 402, respectively. In the change pattern 402, after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning combination, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift The first hold indication of the advance notice target is not changed as it is in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold indication of the notice target is not changed as the special aspect even at the third hold shift timing, and the notice target is also announced in the active shift timing. It is a change pattern which does not change the 1st pending display of as it is in a special mode.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, change pattern 401, change pattern 402, according to the determination result at the start winning combination (display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404, respectively. In the change pattern 403, the first hold display of the advance notice is displayed in the normal mode at the start winning combination, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. The first pending display of the alerting target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the first pending display of the alerting target is not changed as the blue mode at the timing of the third shift shift. (1) It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 404 displays the first hold display of the advance notice target in the blue mode at the start winning combination, and then (1) Do not change the pending display in the blue mode, and do not change the first pending display of the notice object in the blue mode even at the timing of the second pending shift, three times Without change from the first hold display blue aspects notice object in the timing of the hold shift, a change pattern remains unchanged blue embodiments the first hold display notice object in the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the green mode, change pattern 401, change pattern 402, depending on the determination result at the start winning combination (display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404, respectively.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, and the change pattern 405 to the change pattern 412, respectively. In the change pattern 405, after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning combination, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift The first pending display of the advance notice target is not changed as it is in the special mode at the timing of, and the first pending display of the advance notice target is changed to the blue mode at the third pending shift timing. (1) A change pattern for changing the hold display to the red mode, and the change pattern 406 is the first hold display for the advance notice at the time of the start winning, and then the first stop target for the advance notice at the timing of the first hold shift. The pending indication is changed to a special mode, and the first pending indication to be notified is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the second pending shift, and the third pending shift is timed Change the first pending display of the alerting target in red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the first pending display of the alerting target in the blue mode. After displaying the first pending display of the object in the normal mode, the first pending display of the advance notice object is changed to the special mode at the first pending shift timing, and the first pending notice target is delayed at the second pending shift timing. The display is changed to the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed as the red mode at the active shift timing. The change pattern 408 is a first, second, and third hold after the first hold display of the advance notice is displayed in blue mode at the start winning combination. The change pattern 409 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift without changing the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode even at the timing of the shift. After displaying the first hold display of the notice target in blue mode at the time, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in blue mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts, but the timing of the third hold shift The change pattern 410 does not change the first hold display of the notice target in red mode and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 410 is a notice target at the start winning prize. After the first hold display is displayed in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. Without changing the first pending display of the notice target in red mode at the timing of the second pending shift, the first pending display of the notice target in red mode at the timing of the third pending shift and the timing of the active shift The change pattern 411 is a change pattern which does not change, and the change pattern 411 changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red form at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target at the start winning combination in blue. The change pattern 412 does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode even at the second and third hold shift timings and the active shift timing, and the change pattern 412 is the first target of the notice target at the start winning prize. After the pending indication is displayed in red, the timing of the first, second and third pending shifts, and the timing of the active shift Also grayed is without changing the change pattern of the red aspect the first hold display notice object.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the gold mode, change pattern 401, change pattern 402, depending on the determination result at the start winning combination (display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit). Judgment values are assigned to change pattern 403, change pattern 404, change pattern 405, change pattern 406, change pattern 407, change pattern 408, change pattern 409, change pattern 410, change pattern 411, and change pattern 412. ing.

  FIGS. 11-6 is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of 2nd change production. In the case where the first number of pending storages becomes n (n: 1 to 4) as a result of the start-up winning and it is determined to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 (i 1) The 1st to n-th sub hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the first hold memory number n at that time is displayed in the sub hold display area 30TM104 and the sub active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display being executed at that time is The timing (timing at the time of start winning) displayed in the active display area 30TM105, (ii) the secondary reserve display 30TM004 corresponding to the start winning, the position where the fluctuation ranking in the secondary reserve display area 30TM104 is higher (sub active display area 30TM105 Timing (if n 2 2), and (iii) The display corresponding to the fluctuation display based on the start winning at the timing when the sub hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the dynamic winning a prize shifts to the sub active display area 30TM105 (the timing when the sub active display 30TM005 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed) Information (pending display or active display) may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

  In FIG. 11-6, at each timing of (i) to (iii), what kind of display mode is the display information corresponding to the variable display (sub hold display 30TM004 or sub active display 30TM005) for each change pattern Is shown. In the variation patterns shown in FIG. 11-6, “normal” indicates a normal mode that is a white star display, and “blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue star display. "Red" indicates a red aspect which is a red star display.

  If the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one hold shown in FIG. 11-6 (A). Select a table

  For the case where the final display mode determined is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 601 is 100% does not depend on the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit) Judgment values are assigned as determined by. The change pattern 601 is a change pattern in which the sub hold display of the advance target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift after the sub hold display of the advance target is displayed in the normal mode at the start winning combination.

  In the description of FIG. 11-6, “active shift” means that the secondary hold display 30TM 004 shifts from the secondary hold display area 30TM 104 to the secondary active display area 30 TM 105 (as a result, the variation targeted for determination at start winning) It means that the sub active display 30TM005 corresponding to the display is displayed).

  Here, the normal mode is determined as the final display mode, and in the case of the normal mode at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change pattern 601, change pattern 701 described later, change pattern 801, and change pattern 901). After the active shift, the secondary active display 30TM005 does not change in the normal mode.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Also, determination values are assigned to the change patterns 603, respectively. The change pattern 602 is a change pattern in which the sub hold indication of the advance notice is displayed in blue in the normal mode after displaying the sub hold indication of the advance notice at the start winning combination, and the change pattern 603 is the start pattern This is a change pattern in which the sub hold display of the advance target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift after the sub hold display of the advance target is displayed in blue mode at the time of winning.

  Here, the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and in the case of the normal mode at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change pattern 601, change pattern 701 described later, change pattern 801, and change pattern 901). After the active shift, the secondary active indication 30TM005 will change from the normal mode to the blue mode finally. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is selected at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change pattern 902 described later) In the case of 905 905), after the active shift, the secondary active display 30TM 005 does not change in the blue mode.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 603, the change pattern 604, and the change pattern 605, respectively. The change pattern 604 is a change pattern in which the sub hold display of the advance notice is displayed in blue mode at the start winning combination, and then the sub hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub hold display of the advance target is not changed in the red state at the timing of the active shift after the sub hold display of the advance target is displayed in red at the time of winning.

  Here, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and in the case of the normal mode at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change pattern 601, change pattern 701 described later, change pattern 801, and change pattern 901). After the active shift, the secondary active indication 30TM005 will change from the normal mode to the red mode finally. Further, when the red display is determined as the final display display and the display is in the blue display at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704 described later, change patterns 802 to 804, change pattern 902 In the case of ̃905), the secondary active display 30TM 005 will change from the blue aspect to the red aspect after the active shift. In the case where the red display is determined as the final display display and the display is in the red display at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 604 and 605, change patterns 705 to 708 described later, change patterns 805 to 808, change pattern 906). In the case of 912), after the active shift, the secondary active display 30TM005 does not change in the red mode.

  If the first number of pending storages stored in the first pending storage number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two retentions shown in FIG. 11-6 (B). Select a table

  For the case where the final display mode determined is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 701 is 100% does not depend on the determination result at the starting winning combination (display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit) Judgment values are assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 701, after displaying the auxiliary reserve display of the advance notice in the normal mode at the starting winning combination, the auxiliary hold indication of the advance announcement target is not changed as it is in the normal mode at the first hold shift timing. It is a change pattern which does not change the secondary storage indication of advance notice object in the usual mode.

  For the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, change pattern 701, change pattern 702, according to the determination result at the start winning combination (display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 703 and the change pattern 704, respectively. In the change pattern 702, after displaying the auxiliary reserve display of the advance notice in the normal mode at the start winning combination, the auxiliary hold indication of the advance announcement target is not changed as it is in the normal mode at the first hold shift timing, but at the active shift timing. The change pattern 703 is a change pattern for changing the sub hold indication of the advance notice object into the blue mode, and the change pattern 703 is a notice pattern of the advance notice at the first hold shift after displaying the sub hold indication of the notice object at the start winning prize in the normal mode. It is a change pattern that changes the secondary reserve display to the blue mode and does not change the secondary reserve display for the advance notice in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 704 changes the secondary reserve display for the alert target at the start winning combination to the blue mode After displaying in, the timing of the first hold shift and the timing of the active shift, the secondary hold display of the notification target is blue A change pattern remains unchanged at like.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, depending on the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 703, the change pattern 704, and the change pattern 705 to the change pattern 708, respectively. In the change pattern 705, after displaying the auxiliary reserve display of the advance notice in the normal mode at the start winning combination, change the auxiliary hold indication of the advance announcement to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and obtain the advance notice at the active shift timing. The change pattern 706 changes the sub hold display of the red color to the red color, and the change pattern 706 displays the sub hold display for the preliminary target in the blue color at the start winning combination, and then the sub hold for the preliminary target at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in the blue mode, and the sub hold display of the advance object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying it, change the secondary hold display of the notice target to red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and The change pattern 708 is a change pattern which does not change the sub hold indication of the advance notice in the red mode, and the change pattern 708 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub hold indication of the advance notice in the red mode at the start winning. It is a change pattern which does not change the sub-hold indication of advance notice object in the red mode at the timing of active shift.

  If the first number of pending storages stored in the first pending storage number storage area is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three retentions shown in FIG. 11-6 (C). Select a table

  For the case where the final display mode determined is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 801 is 100% does not depend on the determination result at the starting winning combination (display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit) Judgment values are assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 801, after displaying the sub-hold indication of the advance notice in the normal mode at the starting winning combination, the second hold shift of the advance target is not changed at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern which does not change the sub-hold indication of advance notice object in the normal mode at the timing of, and does not change the sub-hold indication of advance notice object in the normal mode even at the timing of active shift.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit) Determination values are assigned to each of the change patterns 802 to 804. In the change pattern 802, after displaying the sub hold indication of the advance notice in the normal mode at the starting winning combination, the second hold shift of the advance target is not changed at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 803 is a change pattern that does not change the sub hold display of the notice object in blue mode at the timing of active shift and does not change the sub hold display of the notice object in blue mode at the timing of active shift. After displaying the sub hold display in the normal mode, the sub hold display of the advance notice is changed to the blue mode at the first hold shift timing, and the second hold shift timing, the active shift timing It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 804 is a secondary hold display for the advance notice at the start winning combination. After displayed in blue manner, first time, for the second time hold shift, a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display notice object at the timing of the active shift remains blue aspect.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 801, the change pattern 802, depending on the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 803, the change pattern 804, and the change pattern 805 to the change pattern 808, respectively. In the change pattern 805, the secondary reserve display of the advance notice is displayed in the normal mode at the starting winning combination, and then the secondary reserve indication of the advance target is changed to the blue mode at the first reserve shift timing, and the second reserve shift timing Is a change pattern in which the sub hold indication of the advance notice object is changed to the red mode and the sub hold indication of the advance notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. Is displayed in the blue mode, and the secondary reserve display for the advance notice is not changed in the blue mode at the first reserve shift timing, and the secondary reserve display for the advance notice is changed to the red mode at the second reserve shift timing Change pattern which does not change the secondary hold display of the advance notice object in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After the sub hold indication of the advance notice is displayed in blue mode at the start winning prize, change the sub hold indication of the notice object in red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift timing, active shift The change pattern 808 is a change pattern that does not change the sub hold indication of the advance notice in the red mode at the timing, and the change pattern 808 is the first and second hold shifts after displaying the sub hold indication of the advance notice in the red mode It is a change pattern which does not change the sub-hold indication of advance notice object in the red mode at the timing of and the timing of the active shift.

  If the first number of pending storages stored in the first pending storage number storage area is “4”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four retentions shown in FIG. 11-6 (D). Select a table

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 901 is 100% does not depend on the determination result at the starting winning combination (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit) Judgment values are assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 901, after displaying the sub hold indication of the advance notice in the normal mode at the starting winning combination, the sub hold indication of the notice target is normally performed at the timing of the first, second and third hold shifts and the active shift timing. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, the change pattern 901 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the starting winning combination (display result specified by the symbol specifying command, removal or big hit) Judgment values are assigned to each of the change patterns 902 to 905. In the change pattern 902, after displaying the sub-hold indication of the advance notice in the normal mode at the starting winning combination, the second stay indication of the advance target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts. The change pattern 903 is a change pattern in which the sub hold display of the advance notice object is changed to the blue mode at the hold shift timing of and the sub hold display of the advance notice object remains the blue mode at the active shift timing. After displaying the sub hold indication of the notice target in the normal mode, the sub hold indication of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub hold of the notice target at the timing of the second hold shift The display changes to the blue mode, and the second hold display for the alert target is displayed in blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 904 is a change pattern which does not change, and the change pattern 904 changes the sub hold display of the notice object to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub hold display of the notice object in the normal mode at the starting winning combination. The second and third hold shift timings and active shift timings are the change patterns that do not change the secondary hold indication for the advance notice in the blue mode, and the change pattern 905 is the blue hold display for the advance notice at the start winning combination. It is a change pattern which does not change the sub-hold indication of advance notice object in the blue mode at the timing of the 1st, 2nd, 3rd hold shift, and the timing of active shift after displaying in a mode.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 901 to the change pattern 905, depending on the determination result at the starting winning combination (display result specified by the symbol designating command, removal or big hit), Also, determination values are assigned to change patterns 906 to 912, respectively. In the change pattern 906, the secondary reserve display of the advance notice is displayed in the normal mode at the starting winning combination, and then the secondary reserve indication of the advance target is not changed as it is at the first reserve shift timing. The secondary hold indication of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the secondary hold indication of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the secondary hold indication of the notice target is red at the timing of the active shift The change pattern 907 is a change pattern that does not change as it is, and the change pattern 907 displays the sub-hold indication of the advance notice in the normal mode at the start winning combination, and then turns the sub-hold indication of the notice object in blue at the timing of the first hold shift. Change the timing of the second pending shift without changing the secondary pending display of the alert target in the blue mode, and the timing of the third pending shift It is a change pattern in which the secondary reserve display of the preliminary announcement target is changed to the red mode and the secondary reserve display of the preliminary announcement target is not changed as it is at the timing of the active shift. Is displayed in the normal mode, then the sub hold indication of the advance notice is changed to the blue mode at the first hold shift timing, and the sub hold indication of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the second hold shift time, It is a change pattern that does not change the secondary reserve display of the alert target in red mode at the timing of the third shift and the active shift timing, and the change pattern 909 displays the secondary reserve display of alert target at the start winning combination in blue mode. After that, do not change the secondary reserve display of the notice object in blue mode at the timing of the first and second reserve shifts, 3 The change pattern 910 is a change pattern in which the sub hold indication of the advance notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the eye hold shift, and the sub hold indication of the advance notice object is not changed as the red mode at the active shift timing. At the same time, after displaying the sub hold indication of the notice target in blue mode, the sub hold indication of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the first hold shift timing, and the sub target of the notice target at the second hold shift timing. It is a change pattern that changes the reserve display to red mode and does not change the secondary reserve display of the advance notice target in red mode at the timing of the third reserve shift and the timing of active shift. After displaying the sub hold indication in blue in blue mode, the sub hold indication of the notification target is red at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern is a change pattern that does not change the secondary hold display of the advance notice target in the red mode at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. After the sub hold display is displayed in the red mode, it is a change pattern in which the sub hold display of the advance notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timings of the first, second and third hold shifts and the active shift.

  As shown in FIG. 11-3, the ratio at which the first change effect for displaying the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 in a display mode different from the normal mode is executed is the secondary hold display 30TM004 or the secondary active display 30TM005. Is higher than the rate at which the second change presentation is performed in which the second change effect is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-3, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of a big hit is higher than when the first change effect is executed.

  As described above, in the lower part of the screen, the player for the notice effect is executed at a high frequency by executing the first change effect of changing the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 having high visibility. Can sustain the interest of On the other hand, with regard to the secondary reserve display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005, which have low visibility, the percentage of big wins differs depending on whether or not they themselves are displayed at the top of the screen, so the player It will be noted whether or not the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are displayed. Furthermore, since the big hit expectation when the second change presentation is executed is higher than the first change presentation, whether or not the display mode changes when the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are displayed Will also pay attention.

  In the present embodiment, a circular or triangular icon (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) displayed at the bottom of the screen and a star icon (sub hold display 30TM004 or sub-active) displayed at the top of the screen The size and shape are different from those of the display 30TM005). That is, a plurality of types of icons corresponding to the common hold storage and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed at different display positions in the same screen. In this example, one of the two types of icons (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) is displayed in a circle, and the other icon (sub hold display 30TM004 or a sub active display 30TM005) is displayed in a star shape. In this way, the characteristics of each icon are made clear so that the player can easily grasp the difference (that is, display information of different types). In addition, it is possible to improve the interest by diversifying the effects by the icons corresponding to the variable display.

  In addition, the common display color corresponding to the common variation display, such as the relationship between the first hold display 30TM001 in the red form displayed at the lower part of the screen and the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the red form displayed at the upper part of the screen. The icons (but the icons differ in shape from round and star) may be displayed at the same time. As a result, the variable display which is the target of the first change effect and the second change effect becomes clearer in the first hold display area 30TM101 and the sub hold display area 30TM104, and the first change effect and the second change effect are displayed. It becomes easy for the player to understand the big hit expectation regarding the target variable display.

  In addition, the icon of the common display color corresponding to the variable display being executed, such as the relationship between the active display 30TM003 in the red form displayed at the lower part of the screen and the secondary active display 30TM005 in the red form displayed at the upper part of the screen (However, the icons may differ in shape from round and star shapes) may be displayed simultaneously. This makes it easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation of the variable display being executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the jackpot expectation varies depending on the combination of the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 and the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, red color The combination of the first hold indication 30TM001 and the red hold indication 30TM004 has the highest probability of winning a big hit), so that the player has an interest in both hold indication modes, and the indication of the hold indication It is possible to enhance the interest of the effect of changing the aspect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3, the big hit expectation differs depending on the combination of the display color of the active display 30TM003 and the display color of the sub-active display 30TM005 (for example, the active display 30TM003 of the golden aspect and the red aspect) The combination of the secondary active display 30TM005 has the highest hit probability), so that the player has an interest in both active display modes and enhances the fun of the effect of changing the display mode of the active display. be able to.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, when the first hold display 30TM001 shifts to the active display area 30TM103 (the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display targeted for the first change presentation is When displayed, the display color is at least the same (i.e., the display color is taken over at the time of the active shift), or changes to a display color with a higher degree of expectation. This allows the player to be interested in how the first hold display 30TM 001 changes.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the sub hold display 30TM 004 shifts to the sub active display area 30 TM 105 (when the sub active display 30 TM 005 corresponding to the variable display targeted for the second change presentation is displayed) The display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is taken over at the time of the active shift), or changes to the display color with higher expectation. This allows the player to be interested in how the secondary hold display 30TM 004 changes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11C, with respect to the high-visibility active display 30TM003, more display modes are provided than the low-visibility sub-active display 30TM005. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the change pattern when changing the aspect of the first reserve display 30TM001 having high visibility changes the aspect of the secondary reserve display 30TM004 having low visibility. It is provided more than the change pattern of. Thus, according to the visibility of the active display and the hold display, by making the types and effects patterns of the effects that can be performed different, the first change effect and the second are prevented while the effects are prevented from becoming excessively complicated. We are trying to raise the interest of change production appropriately.

(Specific example of the first change effect and the second change effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9. FIG. 11-7 is a time chart when performing both the first change presentation and the second change presentation, and FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9 illustrate both the first change presentation and the second change presentation. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing an example of a rendering image displayed on the image display device 5 when executed.

  First, in FIG. 11-8 (1), with the first number of pending storages being 3, the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern on the left, middle and right on the image display device 5 (started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. Shows a state in which the variable display is performed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003 (white circular display) of the normal mode, and the first hold display area 30TM101 displays the first reserved display 30TM001 (white circular display of the normal mode). Three are displayed. At this time, the secondary hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed either. In addition, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub active display area 30TM 105 is not displayed.

  Then, when the variable display of the decorative pattern on the left, middle and right is executed in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-7), winning is newly made. It is assumed that the start winning on the ball device 6A occurs and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (in the present embodiment, the gold mode) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning combination that is the determination target. If the change pattern of the first change effect (the change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and it is determined that the second change effect is to be executed, the sub active display corresponding to the start winning combination that is the determination target The final display mode (red mode in this example) of 30TM 005 and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. At this time, based on the fact that the first number of pending storages is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the pre-reading counter indicates the remaining number of times of the variable display until the variable display which is the target of the pre-prediction notice effect is executed.

  Further, based on the fact that the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the second change effect, the sub active display area 30TM 105 displays the sub active display 30 TM 005 (white star display) in the normal mode, and A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM 105 is displayed. The sub active display 30TM005 displayed at this time corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbol (first special symbol) currently being executed. Further, based on the fact that the first number of pending storages is four, four secondary suspension displays 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode are displayed in the secondary suspension display area 30TM104.

  Furthermore, based on the fact that the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the first change effect, as shown in (T2) of FIG. 11-7 and FIG. 11-8 (2), the change prohibition flag is set. And prohibits the execution of the first change presentation and the second change presentation targeting the start winning combination (the first suspension storage) that occurs later. After the first hold display 30TM001 to be subjected to the first change effect is displayed for the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect (the second hold effect 30TM004 to be the target of the second change effect is displayed And the period until the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 (the sub hold display 30TM004) is ended (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-7).

  Thereby, when a new start winning combination occurs within the prohibition period of the change effect, the first suspension display 30TM001 (white circular display) corresponding to the start combination is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. Within the period, the first hold indication of the normal aspect does not change to another aspect (for example, a special aspect, a blue aspect, or a red aspect). Also, based on the fact that the change prohibition flag is set, the presence or absence of the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process of step S30TM1030 is not performed), so a new start winning combination is made. The corresponding sub hold display 30TM004 and sub active display 30TM005 will not be displayed.

  In addition, although it is not restricted to such a form, when a new starting winning combination occurs within the prohibition period of change production, although the sub-hold display 30TM004 of the normal mode corresponding to the new starting winning combination can be displayed, The display mode of the sub hold display 30TM 004 may not be changed.

  In this example, the first number of pending storages is four based on the start winning combination, so the fourth first pending display 30TM001 and the second pending display region 30TM104 displayed in the first pending display area 30TM101 are displayed. The fourth sub hold display 30TM004 being displayed is a hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified of the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variation display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (3), the variation display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time the sub active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105 is erased. The sub hold display 30TM004 displayed in the sub hold display area 30TM104 is shifted and displayed one by one on the side of the sub active display area 30TM105, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 of the normal mode displayed as the first hold display at a position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the sub hold display 30TM004 of the normal mode displayed as the sub hold display at a position closest to the sub active display area 30TM105 is shifted to the sub active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub active display 30TM005. It will be

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variable display is started. Then, the first hold display of the advance notice object is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the first hold display 30TM 001a which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (5), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side at the same time. While deleting the secondary active display 30TM005 displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105, the secondary storage display (secondary storage display 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode) displayed in the secondary storage display area 30TM104 is set to 1 One by one in the sub active display area 30TM105 side. It was collected displayed in the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variable display is started. And change the first hold display of the advance notice object from the special mode to the blue mode (the first hold display 30TM 001b which is a blue round display in this example), based on the change pattern 906 of the second change presentation The sub-hold indication of the advance notice object is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (in this example, the sub-hold indication 30TM004b, which is a blue star-like display). Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (7), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side at the same time. The secondary active display 30TM 005 displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM 105 is erased, and the secondary storage display (secondary secondary display 30 TM 004 (white star shape display) displayed in the normal mode and the blue mode displayed in the secondary hold display area 30 TM 104 Secondary hold display 30TM004b (blue star shape Shown)) shifts the display one by one sub active display area 30TM105 side, the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variable display is started. And change the first pending display of the notice object from the blue mode to the red mode (the first pending display 30TM 001c, which is a red round display in this example), based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect The sub-hold indication of the advance notice object is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the sub-hold indication 30TM004c, which is a red star-shaped view). Then, based on the end of the variation display time, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (9), the variation display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (10) (timing T6 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM 001c (red circular display in red form) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105 is displayed. While deleting the sub active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub active display area 30TM104, the sub active display (red auxiliary display 30TM004c (red star display) displayed in the red aspect) is displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105. Shift display, the image display device 5 To start the display of the change.

  Then, after the fluctuation display which is the target of the first change effect is executed (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the fluctuation display which is the target of the first change effect is displayed), the effect control CPU 120 performs the figure. In a period from T7 to T8 of 11-7, in the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example). A change pattern for changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 after the shift display will be described later with reference to FIGS. Moreover, when changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003, a change suggestion effect described later may be executed.

  If the secondary active display 30TM005 is not in the final display mode immediately after the shift display, the secondary active display 30TM005 is displayed last in the secondary active display area 30TM105 within the period from T7 to T8 in FIG. 11-7. Change to the aspect. For example, when the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 determined at the start winning combination is red and the sub active display 30TM005 is displayed in blue immediately after the shift display, in the variable display of the notice target, The secondary active display 30TM005 is changed from the blue mode to the red mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11) (timing shown at T8 in FIG. 11-7), the same decorative symbol ("7" in this example) is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area A reach state is established, and reach effect is performed in which the characters “reach !!” are displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, an area overlapping the first hold display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, since the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the reach effect from being lowered and the interest being lowered. can do. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed (until the timing shown at T9 in FIG. 11-7) until the change display of the advance notice object ends.

  As described above, in response to the reach effect being performed at the lower part of the screen, the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 in which the area where the reach effect is performed and at least a part of the display area are common become non-display. On the other hand, with regard to the sub hold display 30TM 004 and the sub active display displayed in the area different from the area where the reach effect is executed, the period during which the reach effect is executed can be continuously displayed in the upper part of the screen. , The player can see these. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the number of on-hold memories even during the execution period of the reach effect, and can grasp the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display.

(A specific example of executing only the first change effect)
Next, a specific example in the case of deciding to execute only the first change effect at the start winning will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-12. 11-10 are time charts when only the first change effect is performed, and FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 are displayed on the image display device 5 when only the first change effect is performed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image.

  First, in FIG. 11-11 (1), when the first number of pending storages is 3, variable display of decorative symbols on the left, middle and right on the image display device 5 (started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. Shows a state in which the variable display is performed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003 (white circular display) of the normal mode, and the first hold display area 30TM101 displays the first reserved display 30TM001 (white circular display of the normal mode). Three are displayed.

  Then, when the variable display of the decorative pattern on the left middle right is executed in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (2) (the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-10), a new winning is achieved. It is assumed that the start winning on the ball device 6A occurs and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute only the first change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (in the present embodiment, the gold mode) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning combination that is the determination target. And, a change pattern of the first change effect (in this example, change pattern 407) is determined. Further, in this example, it is assumed that it is decided not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 (therefore, the second change effect is not performed either). At this time, based on the fact that the first number of pending storages is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the pre-reading counter indicates the remaining number of times of the variable display until the variable display which is the target of the pre-prediction notice effect is executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 based on the determination that the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are not displayed by the determination at the start winning combination. Further, the guide (square frame) indicating the sub active display area 30TM 105 is not displayed either.

  Furthermore, based on the fact that the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the first change effect, as shown in (T2) of FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 (2), the change prohibition flag is set. And prohibits the execution of the first change presentation and the second change presentation targeting the start winning combination (the first suspension storage) that occurs later. In the execution prohibited period of the first change effect and the second change effect, after the first hold display 30TM001 to be subjected to the first change effect is displayed, the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 ends. A period (period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-10) is used.

  Thereby, when a new start winning combination occurs within the prohibition period of the change effect, the first suspension display 30TM001 (white circular display) corresponding to the start combination is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. Within the period, the first hold indication of the normal aspect does not change to another aspect (for example, a special aspect, a blue aspect, or a red aspect). Also, based on the fact that the change prohibition flag is set, the presence or absence of the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process of step S30TM1030 is not performed), so a new start winning combination is made. The corresponding sub hold display 30TM004 and sub active display 30TM005 will not be displayed.

  In addition, although it is not restricted to such a form, when a new starting winning combination occurs within the prohibition period of change production, although the sub-hold display 30TM004 of the normal mode corresponding to the new starting winning combination can be displayed, The display mode of the sub hold display 30TM 004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first number of pending storages is 4 based on the start winning combination, the fourth first pending display 30TM001 displayed in the first pending display area 30TM101 is a notice target for the first change effect. Is a pending display corresponding to the variable display. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (3), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 one by one, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 of the normal mode displayed as the first hold display at a position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variable display is started. Then, the first hold display of the advance notice object is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the first hold display 30TM 001a which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (5), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and The image display apparatus displays the first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side. 5 starts the next variable display.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variable display is started. The first hold display of the notice object is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (the first hold display 30TM 001b which is a blue round display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variation display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (7), the variation display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and The image display apparatus displays the first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side. 5 starts the next variable display.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variable display is started. The first hold display of the advance notice object is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in the present example, the first hold display 30TM 001c which is a red round display). Then, based on the end of the variation display time, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (9), the variation display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (10) (timing T6 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and Shift display of the first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001c (red circular display in red form) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 on the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next fluctuation in the image display device 5 Start the display.

  Then, after the fluctuation display which is the target of the first change effect is executed (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the fluctuation display which is the target of the first change effect is displayed), the effect control CPU 120 performs the drawing. In a period from T7 to T8 of 11-10, in the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c of the red color is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (11) (timing shown at T8 in FIG. 11-10), the same decorative symbol ("7" in this example) is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area A reach state is established, and reach effect is performed in which the characters “reach !!” are displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, an area overlapping the first hold display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed (until the timing shown at T9 in FIG. 11-10) until the change display of the advance notice object ends.

  As described above, when it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the start winning, a new start winning is achieved until the variable display targeted for the first change effect ends. The first change effect based on is not performed, and the second change effect based on the new start winning combination is also not performed. As described above, after changing the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 in the first hold display area 30TM101 having high visibility (after setting it as a mode different from the normal mode), a new start winning combination occurs thereafter. Even in the case where the second change effect based on the new start winning is not performed in the low secondary recognition display area 30TM104 with low visibility, the player is made to pay attention to the first change effect with high visibility. (1) It is intended to prevent the complication of the effect due to the execution of the second change effect for the variable display different from the variable display which is the object of the change effect.

  In the present embodiment, when a new start winning combination occurs after execution of the first change effect (a period in which the first suspension display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start winning combination is performed. Although the example which forbids execution of the 1st change production and the 2nd change production which corresponded to starting winning a prize was shown, after execution of the 1st change production not just this kind of form (the 1st reservation indication 30TM001 normal mode and When a new start winning combination occurs in a period displayed in a different mode), although it is possible to execute the first and second change effects corresponding to the new starting winning combination, at that time The execution ratio of the first change presentation and the second change presentation may be made lower than before the execution of the first change presentation (a period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the normal mode).

  In addition, when a new start winning combination occurs after execution of the first change effect (a period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), not only the second change effect but also other notices You may make it limit execution of production. For example, the number of remaining variable display until the variable display based on the new start winning combination is performed is displayed on the image display 5 every time the variable display is performed (for example, the first number of pending storages is changed from 3 to 0) It is also possible not to execute the countdown effect (displayed as “3”, “2”, “1”, “0”) in accordance with the subtraction by one. In addition, it is possible not to execute the background change effect for changing the background image to the special mode until the variable display based on the new start winning combination is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new start winning combination occurs after execution of the first change effect (a period in which the first suspension display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start winning combination is performed. Although the example which prohibits execution of both the 1st change production and the 2nd change production corresponding to starting winning a prize was shown, after execution of the 1st change production not just this kind of form (the 1st reservation indication 30TM001 usually is When a new start winning combination occurs in a period displayed in a mode different from the mode, the first change effect corresponding to the new starting winning combination can be executed but is compatible with the new start winning combination The second change effect is not executed (the sub hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning is not displayed, or the sub hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning is displayed. As the display mode remains unchanged at the normal mode) as may be.

(Modified example of the first change effect and the second change effect)
In the above embodiment, an example of changing the mode at the timing when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted and displayed in the first change effect, and changing the mode at the timing when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted and displayed in the second change effect However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed according to the execution of the first hold action effect acting on the first hold display 30TM001, and the secondary hold display 30TM004 is operated. The mode of the sub hold display 30TM 004 may be changed according to the execution of the sub hold operation effect.

  11-13, FIG. 11-14, and FIG. 11-15 are specific examples in the case where the first hold action effect is executed in the first change effect, and the sub hold action effect is performed in the second change effect.

  First, FIG. 11-13 (1) has shown the state which is performing the fluctuation display of the decoration pattern in the middle left of the left in the image display apparatus 5 in the state in which the 1st number of pending storages is three. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003 (white circular display) of the normal mode, and the first hold display area 30TM101 displays the first reserved display 30TM001 (white circular display of the normal mode). Three are displayed. At this time, the secondary hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed either. In addition, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub active display area 30TM 105 is not displayed.

  Then, when the variable display of the decorative pattern on the left middle right is executed in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (2), a start winning on the winning ball device 6A newly occurs, It is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (in the present embodiment, the gold mode) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning combination that is the determination target. If the change pattern of the first change effect (the change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and it is determined that the second change effect is to be executed, the sub active display corresponding to the start winning combination that is the determination target The final display mode (red mode in this example) of 30TM 005 and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. At this time, based on the fact that the first number of pending storages is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the pre-reading counter indicates the remaining number of times of the variable display until the variable display which is the target of the pre-prediction notice effect is executed.

  Further, based on the fact that the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the second change effect, the sub active display area 30TM 105 displays the sub active display 30 TM 005 (white star display) in the normal mode, and A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM 105 is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the first number of pending storages is four, four secondary suspension displays 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode are displayed in the secondary suspension display area 30TM104.

  In this example, the first number of pending storages is four based on the start winning combination, so the fourth first pending display 30TM001 and the second pending display region 30TM104 displayed in the first pending display area 30TM101 are displayed. The fourth sub hold display 30TM004 being displayed is a hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified of the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (4), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and the first displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold display 30TM001 is shifted and displayed one by one on the side of the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased and displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. The sub hold display 30TM004 is shifted and displayed one by one on the sub active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 of the normal mode displayed as the first hold display at a position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the sub hold display 30TM004 of the normal mode displayed as the sub hold display at a position closest to the sub active display area 30TM105 is shifted to the sub active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub active display 30TM005. It will be

  Here, when the variable control is started, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first hold display of the advance target during the execution of the variable display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect from the normal mode to the special mode ( In this example, it is recognized to change to the first hold display 30TM 001 a) which is a white triangle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first hold action effect and determines the type of the first hold effect effect to be executed (type of the character). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first hold action effect (action effect A) in which the character A appears.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the first hold action effect (action effect A) based on the determination result. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13 (4), an effect is executed such that the character A appears and throws the ball toward the first hold display 30TM001 to be notified. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character A hits the target first holding display 30TM001, it is possible to make the player expect the aspect of the first holding display 30TM001 to change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (5), the effect control CPU 120 performs special operations on the first hold display of the advance notice target from the normal mode in response to the execution of the first hold operation effect (action effect A). The mode is changed to the mode (the first hold display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (6), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and the first display displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) is shifted and displayed on the active display area 30TM103 side one by one, and at the same time, the sub-display displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105 The active display 30TM005 is erased, and the auxiliary display (the auxiliary display 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode) displayed in the auxiliary display area 30TM104 is shifted to the auxiliary display area 30TM105 one by one. And the image display device 5 To start the next variable display.

  Here, when the variable control is started, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first hold display of the notice target during the execution of the variable display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect from the special mode to the blue mode ( In this example, it is recognized to change to the first hold display 30TM 001 b), which is a blue circular display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first hold action effect and determines the type of the first hold effect effect to be executed (type of the character). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first hold action effect (action effect B) in which the character B appears.

  In addition, when the variable control is started, the CPU 120 for effect control based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, and during the execution of the variable display, the sub-hold display of the advance target is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (this example In this case, it is recognized that the display is changed to the sub hold display 30TM 004 b) which is a blue star display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the auxiliary holding action effect and the type of the auxiliary holding action effect to be executed (type of character). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-hold effect presentation (action presentation a) in which the character a appears.

  Based on these determination results, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the first hold action effect (action effect B). In the example shown in FIG. 11-13 (7), the effect is executed such that the character B appears and throws the ball toward the first hold display 30TM 001a to be notified. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character B hits the first hold display 30TM001a to be notified, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (8), the effect control CPU 120 performs the first hold display of the advance notice target from the special mode in blue in response to the execution of the first hold operation effect (action effect B). It changes to the mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM 001 b, which is a blue circular display).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the sub hold action effect (action effect a) within the same fluctuation display period. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14 (9), the effect is executed in such a manner that the character a appears and the balloon is blown toward the secondary hold display 30TM 004 to be notified. As shown in FIG. 11-14 (10) and FIG. 11-15 (11), the balloon from which the character a has jumped flies toward the sub hold display 30TM 004 to be notified and reaches the position of the sub hold display 30 TM 004 By displaying an image to be displayed, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub hold display 30TM004.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (11) and (12), when the balloon reaches the position of the secondary storage display 30TM004 to be notified, the mode of the secondary storage display 30TM004 is balloon-shaped (sub-storage display 30TM004F Change to). Subsequently, an image (secondary display 30TM 004 G) in which the balloon is broken is displayed. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (13) and (14), normally executes the sub-hold display of the advance target in response to the execution of the sub-hold function effect (action effect a). To the blue mode (in this example, the secondary hold display 30TM004b, which is a blue star display). Then, based on the end of the variation display time, as shown in FIG. 11-14 (15), the variation display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-14 (16), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and the first displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) is shifted and displayed on the active display area 30TM103 side one by one, and at the same time, the sub-display displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105. Along with erasing the active display 30TM005, the secondary storage display (a secondary storage display 30TM004 (white star display) in a normal mode) and a secondary storage display 30TM004b (blue star display in a blue mode) displayed in the secondary storage display area 30TM104. )) One by one secondary active table Shifted displayed in the area 30TM105 side, the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, when the variable control is started, the CPU 120 for effect control based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, from blue to red In this example, it is recognized to change to the first hold display 30TM 001c) which is a red circular display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first hold action effect and determines the type of the first hold effect effect to be executed (type of the character). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first hold action effect (action effect C) in which the character C appears.

  In addition, when the variable control is started, the CPU 120 for effect control based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, during the execution of the variable display, the sub-hold display of the advance notice object from the blue mode to the red mode (this example Then, it is recognized that the display is changed to the secondary hold display 30TM004c) which is a red star display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the auxiliary holding action effect and the type of the auxiliary holding action effect to be executed (type of character). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-hold effect presentation (action presentation b) in which the character b appears.

  Based on these determination results, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the first hold action effect (action effect C). In the example shown in FIG. 11-15 (17), the effect is executed such that the character C appears and the ball is thrown toward the first hold display 30TM 001 b to be notified. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character C hits the first hold display 30TM001b to be notified, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (18), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the execution of the first on-hold action effect (action effect C) to display the first on-hold display of the notice target from the blue mode to the red mode. It changes to the mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red circular display).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the sub hold action effect (action effect b) within the same fluctuation display period. In the example shown in FIG. 11-15 (19), the effect is executed in such a manner that the character b appears and the balloon is blown toward the sub hold display 30TM 004 b to be notified. As shown in FIG. 11-15 (20) and FIG. 11-15 (21), the balloon from which the character b flies flies toward the sub hold display 30TM 004 b to be notified and reaches the position of the sub hold display 30 TM 004 b By displaying an image to be displayed, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub hold display 30TM 004 b.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (21) and (22), when the balloon reaches the position of the secondary storage display 30TM004b to be notified, the mode of the secondary storage display 30TM004b is balloon-shaped (sub-storage display 30TM004F Change to). Subsequently, an image (secondary display 30TM 004 G) in which the balloon is broken is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (23) and (24), the effect control CPU 120 causes the sub hold display of the advance target to be displayed in blue in response to the execution of the sub hold operation effect (action effect b). To the red mode (in this example, the secondary hold display 30TM004c, which is a red star display). .

  As described above, the effect modes are different between the first hold action effect performed when changing the mode of the first hold display and the sub hold action effect performed when changing the mode of the sub hold display. By this, it is possible to further improve the interest due to the existence of a plurality of types of suspension correspondence displays (the first suspension display and the second suspension display).

  Note that, as shown in FIGS. 11-13 to 11-15, effects may be performed when the character appears and the action is performed on the icon when changing the display mode of the active display, In addition, it may be performed when changing the display mode of the sub active display. For example, when the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the normal mode, the character A appears and the active display 30TM003 is displayed in response to the execution of the active effect rendering action to throw the ball toward the active display 30TM003. The aspect may be changed from a normal aspect to another aspect (special aspect, blue aspect, green aspect, red aspect, golden aspect). Also, when the secondary active display 30TM005 is displayed in the normal mode, the secondary active is performed in response to the secondary active operation effect that performs the action of causing the character a to appear and fly the balloon toward the secondary active display 30TM005. The display mode of the display 30TM005 may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (blue mode, red mode). As described above, the effect mode is different between the active action effect performed when changing the aspect of the active display and the sub active action effect performed when changing the aspect of the sub active display, and thus, a plurality of types can be obtained. It is possible to further improve the interest due to the presence of the fluctuation corresponding display (active display and sub active display).

  In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the first change presentation or the execution ratio of the second change presentation may be different according to the current setting values (1 to 6) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, compared with the case where the setting value is low (1 to 3), in the case where the setting value is high (4 to 6), the ratio that the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is high. In addition, the percentage in which the secondary retention display 30TM004 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (or the percentage in which the secondary retention display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 itself are displayed) may be high. In addition, the number of times of change of the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 is larger (for example, three times) when the setting value is high (4 to 6) than when the setting value is low (1 to 3). The rate at which the change pattern is selected is high, and the rate at which the number of times of change in the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM 004 is large (for example, twice) may be high.

(Active change production and change suggestion production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning is generated, but as described above, the display mode of the active display during the active shift is the final display mode. In the case of being different, an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is executed.

  Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is performed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not performed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to execute a change suggestion effect that suggests that there is a possibility of changing. The change suggestion effect includes a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed to change the failure mode. When the suggestion effect is performed, the display mode of the active display is not changed.

  When the CPU 120 for effect control performs an active shift accompanied by the start of the variable display, the display mode of the active display at the time of the active shift is different from the final display mode of the active display determined when the start winning is generated. In this case, the active display is changed from the display mode at the time of the active shift to the final display mode within the period of the variable display by executing the active change effect and the change indication effect during the execution of the variable display.

  In this case, when the variable control is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern to change the active display from the display mode at the active shift time to the final display mode. 11-16 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a table for determining the change pattern of the active display. In this embodiment, determination values are assigned to the special mode as a final display mode of the active display, the blue mode, the green mode, the red mode, and the golden mode, respectively. Note that the display of “o” in FIG. 11-16 indicates that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and the display of “?” Indicates that the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. ing.

  If the active display during the active shift is in the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), in the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode, when the final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 100%. Judgment values are assigned. The number of times of execution of the change indication effect in the change pattern 011 is two, and one of the success modes is one and the failure mode is one. In the change pattern 011, after displaying the active display in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the change indication rendering of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the change suggestion rendering of the failure mode is performed and active It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the special mode.

  When the final display mode is a blue mode, determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 012 is selected 60% and the change pattern 013 is selected 40%. The number of times of execution of the change indication effect in the change pattern 012 and the change pattern 013 is three, and of these, two success modes and one failure mode are performed. In the change pattern 012, after displaying the active display in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the change indication rendering of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the change suggestion rendering of the success mode is performed and active It is a change pattern that changes the display to the blue mode and then executes the change indication effect of the failure mode and does not change the active display as the blue mode, and the change pattern 013 displays the active display in the normal mode at the active shift. After that, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the change indication effect of the failure mode is performed to change the active display as the special mode, and then the change of the success mode It is a change pattern which performs an indication production and changes an active display to a blue mode.

  When the final display mode is the green mode, determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 014 is selected at 70% and the change pattern 015 is selected at a probability of 30%. The number of times of execution of the change indication effect in the change pattern 014 and the change pattern 015 is four, and of these, three success modes and one failure mode are performed. In the change pattern 014, after displaying the active display in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the change indication rendering of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the change suggestion rendering of the success mode is performed and active The display is changed to the blue mode, and then the change mode of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change mode of the failure mode is performed to change the active mode as the green mode. In the change pattern 015, after displaying the active display in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the change indication rendering of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter the change presentation of the success mode is suggested To change the active display to the blue mode, and then execute the change mode indication of the failure mode. The active display without change from blue aspect, the change pattern running changes suggested effect of subsequent success embodiment changes the active display in green mode.

  In the case where the final display mode is a red mode, determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 016 is selected 80% and the change pattern 017 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change indication effect in the change pattern 016 and the change pattern 017 is five, of which four success modes and one failure mode are performed. In the change pattern 016, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the change indication production of the success aspect is performed to change the active display to the special aspect, and then the change suggestion production of the success mode is performed and active The display is changed to the blue mode, and then the change mode of the success mode is performed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change mode of the success mode is performed to change the active display to the red mode. After that, it is a change pattern which does not change the active display in the red mode by executing the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, and the change pattern 017 shows the change suggestion effect of the success mode after displaying the active display in the normal mode at the active shift. To change the active display to a special aspect, and then execute a change aspect indication of success aspect Change the active display to the blue mode, then execute the change indication effect of the success mode to change the active display to the green mode, and then execute the change indication effect of the failure mode to change the active display as the green mode It is a change pattern in which the change indication effect of the success mode is executed after that without changing the active display into the red mode.

  In addition, in the case where the final display mode is the golden mode, determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 018 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of times of execution of the change indication effect in the change pattern 018 is five, and of these, five success modes and zero failure modes are performed. In the change pattern 018, after displaying the active display in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the change indication rendering of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the change suggestion rendering of the success mode is performed and active The display is changed to the blue mode, and then the change mode of the success mode is performed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change mode of the success mode is performed to change the active display to the red mode. After that, it is a change pattern in which the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display into the gold mode.

  If the active display during the active shift is a special mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the special mode, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (B). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), in the active display change pattern determination table for the special mode, when the final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 021 is selected with a probability of 100%. Judgment values are assigned. The number of times of execution of the change indication effect in the change pattern 021 is two, and one of the success modes is one and the failure mode is one. In the change pattern 021, after the active display is displayed in a special mode at the time of the active shift, the change indication production of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change presentation production of the failure mode is performed and active It is a change pattern which does not change the display in the blue mode.

  When the final display mode is the green mode, determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 022 is selected at 70% and the change pattern 023 is selected at a probability of 30%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 022 and the change pattern 023 is three, and of these, two success modes and one failure mode are performed. In the change pattern 022, after the active display is displayed in a special mode at the time of the active shift, the change indication production of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change presentation production of the success mode is performed and active It is a change pattern that changes the display to the green mode and then executes the change indication effect of the failure mode and does not change the active display as the green mode, and the change pattern 023 displayed the active display in the special mode at the active shift. After that, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change indication effect of the failure mode is executed to change the active display as the blue mode, and then the change of the success mode It is a change pattern which performs an indication production and changes an active display to a green mode.

  In the case where the final display mode is the red mode, determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 024 is selected 80% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change indication effect in the change pattern 024 and the change pattern 025 is four, and of these, three success modes and one failure mode are performed. In the change pattern 024, after the active display is displayed in a special mode at the time of the active shift, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change indication effect of the success mode is executed and active The display is changed to the green mode, and then the change mode of the success mode is performed to change the active display to the red mode, and thereafter the change mode of the failure mode is performed to change the active display as the red mode. The change pattern 025 is a change pattern 025 that displays the active display in a special mode at the time of active shift, then executes a change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the blue mode, and then changes the success mode change suggestion effect To change the active display to the green mode, and then to execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode. Without changing the active display stays green aspect, the change pattern running changes suggested effect of subsequent success embodiment changes the active display red manner.

  Further, in the case where the final display mode is the golden mode, determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 026 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 026 is four, and of these, the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 026, after the active display is displayed in a special mode at the time of the active shift, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change indication effect of the success mode is executed and active Change the display to the green mode, then execute the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the red mode, and then execute the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the gold mode It is a pattern.

  If the active display at the time of the active shift is in the blue mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode as shown in FIG. 11-16 (C). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (C), in the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, the change pattern 031 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the green mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of times of execution of the change indication effect in the change pattern 031 is two, and one of the success modes is one and the failure mode is one. In the change pattern 031, after displaying the active display in blue mode at the time of active shift, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change indication effect of the failure mode is executed and active It is a change pattern which does not change the display in the green mode.

  In the case where the final display mode is the red mode, determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 032 is selected 80% and the change pattern 033 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 is three, and of these, two success modes and one failure mode are performed. In the change pattern 032, after displaying the active display in blue mode at the time of active shift, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change indication effect of the success mode is executed and active It is a change pattern that changes the display to the red mode and then executes the change indication effect of the failure mode and does not change the active display as the red mode, and the change pattern 033 displays the active display in the blue mode at the active shift. After that, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter the change indication effect of the failure mode is performed to not change the active display as the green mode, and then the change of the success mode It is a change pattern which performs an indication production and changes an active display to a red mode.

  In addition, in the case where the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned such that the change pattern 034 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of times of execution of the change indication effect in the change pattern 034 is three, and of these, the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 034, after displaying the active display in blue mode at the time of active shift, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change indication effect of the success mode is executed and active It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the red mode, and then the change mode for indicating the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

  If the active display at the time of the active shift is in the red mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode as shown in FIG. 11-16 (D). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (D), in the active display change pattern determination table for the red color mode, the change pattern 041 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display style is the gold color mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of times of execution of the change indication effect in the change pattern 041 is one, and one of the success modes is one and the failure mode is zero. The change pattern 041 is a change pattern in which the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode after the active display is displayed in the red mode at the time of the active shift.

  As shown in FIG. 11-16, within one variation display period (in this example, the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode before the reach state is established, so the variation display is started after the variation display is started In the period until the state is established, the more the change indication effect is executed, especially, the more the change indication effect of the success mode is executed, the display color is changed to a high-hit expected color The proportion will be high.

  Here, in the present embodiment, at the stage when the n-th change suggestion effect is executed, the ratio of the n + 1-th change suggestion effect being executed is higher as the number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect of the success mode up to that time increases. Is configured as. For example, in the stage (in the case of n = 2) where the second change suggestion effect is executed, the third change suggestion effect is always executed when both are successful modes. If one out of two is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed. The same applies to the case of n = 3 and the case of n = 4. Thus, when the change indication effect is executed, the same change occurs as the number of executions of the change indication effect of the success aspect performed within the period from when the change display is started until the reach state is established. Since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is performed is high within the display period (within the period from when the variable display is started to when the reach state is established), the player can count the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed, particularly the success mode. By paying attention to the number of executions of the change indication effect of, it is possible to improve the interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the larger the ratio of [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is performed] to the [number of times the change suggestion effect is performed] within the variable display period of 1, the big hit expectation The rate of change to a high degree display mode is high. Specifically, [number of times execution of change suggestion effect of success mode / number of execution of change suggestion effect] is 1/2 when the final display mode is special mode, and the final display mode is blue mode In the case where the final display mode is the green mode, the final display mode is the golden mode and the final display mode is the blue mode. If it becomes, it is 5/5. As described above, the larger the rate at which the active display changes to a display mode with a high hit probability, the higher the [number of executions of change suggestion effect of success mode / number of execution of change suggestion effect]. Also, attention is paid to the relationship between the number of times of execution of the change indication effect and the number of times of execution of the change indication effect of the success mode, whereby the interest can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of times in which the change indication effect of the success mode is continuously performed is large, the ratio of changing to the display mode having a high hit probability is high. Specifically, the number of continuous change indication effects in the success mode is 1 (not continuous) or 2 when the final display mode is the blue mode, and the final display mode is the green mode. It is 2 or 3 and is 3 or 4 when the final display mode is the red mode, and is 5 when the final display mode is the golden mode. As a result, the player is interested in whether or not the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed, and how many times it continues.

  Further, in the present example, when the final display mode is the same display color, a change pattern in which the number of continuous change suggestion effects in the success mode is more likely to be selected. For example, in the case of the blue mode, the rate at which the change pattern 012 (two continuous) is selected is higher than that of the change pattern 013 (not continuous), and in the green mode, the change pattern is different than the change pattern 015 (two continuous) The ratio in which 014 (3 consecutive) is selected is higher, and in the case of the red color, the ratio in which the change pattern 016 (4 continuous) is selected is higher than the change pattern 017 (3 continuous). As described above, even when the display color is the same in the end, by making it easy to continue the change suggestion effect of the success mode, the player's sense of expectation can be further enhanced.

  Based on the change pattern shown in FIG. 11-16 determined at the start winning combination, the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of times of execution of the change indication effect and the mode (success or failure aspect) of the change indication effect. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect based on whether each change indication effect is a success mode or a failure mode and whether or not the next change suggestion effect is to be executed. decide. As types of change indication effects, change indication effects A in which character A appears, change indication effects B in which character B appears, change indication effects C in which character C appears, change indication effects D in which character D appears, and characters There is a change indication effect E in which E appears.

  The effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 11-17 when the change suggestion effect executed at the n-th time is a success mode and the n + 1-th change suggestion effect is executed in the change pattern determined at the start winning combination. Select the table of "Success mode, next performance execution". When the change indication effect determination table is [Success mode, next effect execution], 10% character A, 20% character B, 30% character C, 40% character D, 0% character E Judgment values are assigned to be selected by probability.

  The effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 11-17 when the change suggestion effect executed at the n-th time is a success mode and the n + 1-th change suggestion effect is not executed in the change pattern determined at the start winning combination. Select the table of "Successful mode, next no effect execution". When the change indication effect determination table is [Success mode, no next effect execution], 5% for character A, 15% for character B, 30% for character C, 45% for character D, 5% for character E Judgment values are assigned to be selected by probability.

  The effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 11-17 when the change suggestion effect executed at the n-th time is a failure mode and the n + 1-th change suggestion effect is executed at the change pattern determined at the start winning combination. Failure mode, next time there is a presentation execution] table is selected. When the change indication effect determination table is [Failure mode, next effect execution is performed], 37% of character A, 32% of character B, 30% of character C, 1% of character D, 0% of character E Judgment values are assigned to be selected by probability.

  The effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 11-17 when the change suggestion effect executed at the n-th time is a failure mode and the n + 1-th change suggestion effect is not executed in the change pattern determined at the start winning combination. Select the table of failure mode, next time there is no effect execution]. When the change indication effect determination table is [Failure mode, no next effect execution], the character A is 35%, the character B is 30%, the character C is 30%, the character D is 5%, and the character E is 0% Judgment values are assigned to be selected by probability.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines, for each change indication effect, the type of change indication effect based on the change indication effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-17. Therefore, when the n-th and n + 1-th change suggestion effects are executed, for example, the character A is selected in the n-th change suggestion effect, and all characters of the characters A to E are selected in the n + 1 change suggestion effect May be selected. That is, when the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears at the nth time is executed, there is a possibility that the change suggestion effect B in which the character B different from the character A appears at the n + 1th time is executed. There is also a possibility that a change indication effect A in which a character A similar to the n-th time appears in the turn may be performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change indication effect.

  As shown in FIG. 11-17, the change indication effect A in which the character A appears has a low probability of becoming a success mode, but the probability that the next change indication effect is executed is high, and the change indication effect in which the character D appears Although D has a high probability of becoming a success mode, the probability that the next change suggestion effect is performed is low. In addition, the change suggestion effect E in which the character E appears has a probability of 100% in the success mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is performed is 0%. Therefore, for the player, when the character A is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display changes is low, but the expectation that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high. When the character D is displayed on the screen, the expectation for changing the display mode of the active display is high, but the expectation for executing the next change suggestion effect is low, and the character E is displayed on the screen. In this case, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the next change indication effect is not performed (the current change indication effect is the last).

  As described above, since the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes to a mode with a high hit probability is different according to the type of the characters appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears It will be done. In addition, since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears.

  Note that the effect type is not limited to the effect type shown in FIG. 11-17, and for example, the effect type may have a low change ratio of the display mode of the active display and a low ratio of the next change suggestion effect being executed. An effect type may be provided in which the rate at which the display mode of display changes is high and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is also high.

(Specific example of active change production and change suggestion production)
Next, specific examples of the active change effect and the change indication effect will be described using FIGS. 11-18 to 11-20. The effect example shown in FIG. 11-18, FIG. 11-19 (9) to (12), and FIG. 11-20 is determined that the CPU 120 for effect control sets the final display mode to the golden mode at the start winning combination. It is an example of a case where it is determined that the mode at the time of the active shift is set as the normal mode and the change pattern of the active display is set as the change pattern 018 when the variable display based on the start winning is started. . 11-18 and FIGS. 11-19 (9), (10), and (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 performs a green display on the final display mode at the start winning combination. And the mode at the time of the active shift is determined to be the normal mode, and the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 014 when the variable display based on the start winning combination is started. It is.

  In this example, based on the change pattern 018, it is decided to execute the change indication effect A in which the character A appears for the first change indication effect, and based on the second change indication effect being executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed It is decided to execute the change suggestion production B of the success mode based on that being performed, and it is decided to carry out the change suggestion production C where the character C appears for the third change suggestion production, and the fourth It is determined to execute the change suggestion production C of the success mode based on the execution of the change suggestion production of It is decided to carry out the change suggestion production D to be performed, and it is decided to carry out the change suggestion production D for the success mode based on the execution of the fifth change suggestion production, and the fifth change suggestion It is assumed that it is decided to execute the change indication effect E of the success mode in which the character E appears regarding the effect.

  11-18 (1), the active display 30TM 003 (white circular display) of the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM 103, and the image display device 5 executes the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern in the middle left and the left Showing the status.

  The CPU 120 for effect control executes the change indication effect A of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the first change indication effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1), a character A appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character A performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003 is displayed, and then FIG. As shown in -18 (2), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003 of the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. This effect image is an image recalling that the active display has exploded. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (3), in response to the completion of the first change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays an active display 30TM003a (white triangle display) in a special mode. .

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change indication effect B of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the second change indication effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (4), a character B appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character B performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003a is displayed, and then FIG. As shown in -18 (5), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character B has hit the active display 30TM003a is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the special mode active display 30TM003a is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (6), in response to the completion of the second change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003b (blue circular display) in the blue mode. Ru.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change indication effect C of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the third change indication effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (7), a character C appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image for performing an action of throwing a ball while the character C flies toward the active display 30TM003b is displayed. As shown in FIG. 11-18 (8), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character C has hit the active display 30TM 003 b is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the blue active display 30TM003b is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (9), in response to the completion of the third change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays an active display 30TM003d (green circular display) in a green color. Ru.

  Next, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the change indication effect D of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the fourth change indication effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image for performing an action of throwing a ball while the character D flies toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed. As shown in FIG. 11-19 (11), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character D has hit the active display 30TM 003d is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the green-colored active display 30TM003d is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (12), in response to the completion of the fourth change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays an active display 30TM003c (red circular display) in a red color. Ru.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change indication effect E of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the fifth change indication effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (13), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which a crack is included in the transparent member (glass plate etc.) constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. . Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (14), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in a mode in which the crack range is expanded is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (15), an image in which the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is broken (screen broken image 30TM 210) is displayed, and the character E appears from the center of the screen, An effect image for performing an action of throwing a ball while the character E flies toward the active display 30TM003c is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (16), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character E has hit the active display 30TM003c is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003c in a red color is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (17), in response to the end of the fifth change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003e (golden round display) in a golden aspect. Ru.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (18), the split screen image 30TM 210 displayed on the image display device 5 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 11-20 (19), the left symbol display area and the right symbol are displayed. A reach state in which the same decorative pattern ("7" in this example) is stopped in the display area is established, and the word "reach !!" is displayed in the lower part of the screen (the area overlapping with the active display area 30TM103) The presentation is performed. Here, as described above, at the timing when the reach is established, the active display 30TM003e in the golden form is not displayed, and the square frame indicating the active display area 30TM103 is also not displayed. The information which became non-display is not displayed until the change display of the said alerting | reporting object is complete | finished.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 11-18 and FIGS. 11-19 (9), (10), and (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode to be the green mode at the start winning game. It is an example at the time of deciding the mode at the time of an active shift to be a normal mode and making the change pattern of the active display to be the change pattern 014 when starting the variable display based on the start winning combination. .

  In this example, based on the change pattern 014, it is decided to execute the change indication effect A in which the character A appears for the first change indication effect, and based on the second change indication effect being executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed It is decided to execute the change suggestion production B of the success mode based on that being performed, and it is decided to carry out the change suggestion production C where the character C appears for the third change suggestion production, and the fourth It is determined to execute the change suggestion production C of the success mode based on the execution of the change suggestion production of Changes suggested effect decided to run a D, and it is assumed that the fifth variation suggest effect is decided to execute the changes suggested effect D failure mode based on the not executed for.

  11-18 (1) to 11-19 (9) are the same as the effect example of the change pattern 018 described above, since the effect examples (first change suggestion effect to third change suggestion effect) shown in FIGS. The effect example shown in FIGS. 11-19 (10) and (20) to (22) will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the change indication effect D of the failure mode in response to the execution timing of the fourth change indication effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image for performing an action of throwing a ball while the character D flies toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed. As shown in FIG. 11-19 (20), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character D did not hit the active display 30TM 003d is displayed. At this time, an active display 30TM003d in a green color is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the above-described effect image (active display 30TM003G) is not displayed, and instead, the character D is not hit and hit. An effect image in which the ball rolls toward the lower right of the screen is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (21), when the fourth change suggestion effect is finished, the active display area 30TM103 continuously displays the active display 30TM003d in a green color. That is, the display mode of the active display does not change from before the execution of the fourth change suggestion effect (after the end of the third change suggestion effect).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (22), a reach state in which the same decorative symbol ("4" in this example) is stopped is established in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area, and "reach !! A reach effect is performed in which the character “is displayed in the lower part of the screen (the area overlapping with the active display area 30TM103). Here, as described above, since the active display area 30TM103 is not displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, the green-form active display 30TM003d is not displayed until the variation display of the advance notice object is completed.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-18 (1) to 11-20 (19), in the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the variation display of the decorative pattern in the middle left and right in the image display device 5 The change indication effect is performed a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) according to the change pattern. Then, when the execution of the change suggestion effect of the predetermined number of times is completed, the same decorative pattern is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area to establish the reach state. That is, while the effect control CPU 120 is executing the change indication effect a predetermined number of times, the image display device 5 temporarily stops the decorative pattern on the left middle, changes the direction of the fluctuation display, or reaches the reach state It does not hold. According to such a configuration, since the change indication mode of the decorative pattern does not change during the period in which the change indication effect is performed a predetermined number of times according to the change pattern, the change indication effect can be noticed more.

  11-16 shows a change pattern in which the change indication effect of the failure mode is not continuous, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a change pattern in which the change indication effect of the failure mode may be continuous may be provided . In addition, a change pattern may be provided in which the change indication effect of the failure mode is executed more often than the change indication effect of the success mode. For example, a change pattern may be provided in which the change indication effect of the success mode is executed twice consecutively after the change indication effect of the failure mode is executed three consecutive times. In addition, although the change indication effect of the failure mode is executed one or more times, a effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change may be provided because the change indication effect of the success mode is not executed even once.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11-16 and the like, the display mode of the active display does not change when the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed, and the change display effect of the success mode is always executed when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed. Although an example in which the display mode changes is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and when the change indication effect of the success mode is executed, the rate is active at a higher rate than when the change indication effect of the failure mode is executed. Any configuration may be used as long as the display mode of the display changes. For example, even when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, an effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change may be provided. Even when the suggested effect is executed, an effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode of the active display changes.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11-16 and the like, when the change indication effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is a display mode in which the big hit expectation is one step higher (from the normal mode to the special mode, the special mode Although the example which changes from a blue mode, a blue mode to a green mode, a green mode to a red mode, and a red mode to a golden mode is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and a change mode indicating success mode is executed. For the display mode of the active display, a change pattern may be provided in which the display mode of the active display changes from a normal mode to a green mode, a blue mode, a gold mode, and the like having a high expectation of two or more steps. In addition, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps may be different depending on the type of the change indication effect to be executed (for example, the type of the appearing character). For example, the change indication effect in which the character A appears When is performed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is low, and when the change indication effect that the character B appears is performed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more stages is high. Also good. Furthermore, when the change suggestion effect that the character C appears is executed, the display mode may be changed by three steps.

  In the above embodiment, the change indication effect may be performed at a timing before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. Specifically, before the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, when the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the change pattern in which the pseudo continuous change to be changed again after temporary stopping the decorative symbol is executed one or more times. A change suggestion effect of the success mode may be executed. For example, when n temporary stops are executed, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed before each temporary stop (a total of n change indications of the success mode are continuously executed), and then By executing the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, it may be suggested that the (n + 1) th temporary stop is not performed. In addition, when the change display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the change pattern in which the pseudo continuous change is not executed even once, the effect pattern in which only the change indication effect of failure mode is executed and the change indication effect of success mode is not performed. May be provided. In addition, when variation display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation is performed a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, n + 1), the change suggestion effect of n + 1 success modes is continuously performed. An effect pattern may be provided which is executed and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is not executed.

  In such a configuration, the change indication effect is started in a state where the decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped (a character appears), and the change indication effect is ended before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (character Action is taken to change the display mode of the active display). For example, the character A appears and action is performed immediately after the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the special mode, and then the first temporary stop is performed and the first time After the re-variation of is started, the character B appears and the action is performed to change the display mode of the active display from the special mode to the blue mode, and then the second temporary stop is performed and the second re-variation is After being started, the character C may appear to perform an action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the green mode. As described above, by not overlapping the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol (that is, the period during which the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is changed), attention can be paid to the change suggestive effect While being able to be done, it is possible not to decrease the rendering effect when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.

  In addition, when performing the effect of changing the display direction of the decorative design from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, the change suggestion effect is started while the decorative design is displayed in the vertical direction (character appears) Before the change display direction of the decorative symbol is changed to the horizontal direction, the change indication effect may be ended (the character performs an action to change the display mode of the active display). For example, immediately after the change display of the decorative symbol is started, the first character appears and the action is performed to change the display mode of the active display from the normal mode to the blue mode, and then the change display direction of the decorative symbol is from the vertical direction After changing in the lateral direction, the next character may appear to perform an action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the red mode. As described above, by not overlapping the execution period of one change indication effect and the timing at which the change display direction of the decoration pattern changes, attention can be paid to the change indication effect, and the change indication of the decoration pattern is displayed. It is possible not to reduce the rendering effect when the direction changes.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the change indication effect is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes, but not limited to such a form, the change indication effect is a display mode of the hold display It may be an effect that suggests that For example, the change pattern shown in FIG. 11-16 may be used as the change pattern when changing the display mode of the hold display, and when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed When the change indication effect of the failure mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not be changed.

  In the above embodiment, in any case of the change indication effect of the success mode and the change indication effect of the failure mode, the character that appeared is the effect that acts on the same action (active display or hold display, for example, ball An example of performing an action to throw a) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, but in the change suggestion effect of the success aspect, the appearing character performs an action for changing the display aspect of the active indication or the hold indication In the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the appearing character may not perform an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. Note that the action performed by the appearing character may be different depending on the change indication effect of the success mode and the change indication effect of the failure mode. For example, in the change indication effect of the success mode, an active display or a hold display to be changed Action to throw the ball in the direction (active indication or effect acting on the hold indication), and in the change indication effect of failure mode, the action to throw the ball in the direction different from the active indication or the hold indication (active indication or hold indication An effect that does not act may be performed.

  In the above embodiment, as the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success aspect performed within the predetermined period from when the fluctuation display is started until the reach state is established, the next change suggestion effect within the predetermined period is more frequent. An example was shown in which the probability of big hit was higher as the ratio of the number of times the change suggestion effect was performed to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect performed within the predetermined period is higher. . However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and until the decorative symbol (the combination of the decorative symbols or the pseudo-connected symbol that will be re-varied (pseudo-run) after the temporary stop) is temporarily stopped It may be a period, or it may be a period from the temporary stop of the decorative pattern to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern after re-variation of the decorative pattern (that is, a period between pseudo reams). In addition, the predetermined period may be a period from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the first stop of any of the left, middle and right decorative symbols, and all of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are from the start of variation of the decorative pattern. It may be a period until the decision stop.

  In the above embodiment, when a plurality of change suggestion effects are performed, a plurality of patterns may be present for a period from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect. For example, in the case where the interval from the end of the change suggestion effect of 1 to the start of the next change suggestion effect is long, the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is a success mode is higher than in the case where the interval is short, You may make it high. In addition, when a large number of change suggestion effects are performed, the interval may be gradually shortened, and the jackpot expectation may be gradually increased accordingly. According to such a mode, when the change suggestion effect of 1 is finished, the player also determines whether or not the next change suggestion effect is executed, and also the interval until the next change suggestion effect is started. You can become interested and improve the interest.

  In the above embodiment, the rate at which the display mode of the active display is changed may be different according to the current setting values (1 to 6) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, compared with the case where the setting value is low (1 to 3), the proportion of the display mode of the active display being displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher when the setting value is high (4 to 6) You may do so. In addition, when the setting value is high (4 to 6), the number of times of change of the display color of the active display is larger (for example, three times or more) compared to the case where the setting value is low (1 to 3) The rate at which the pattern is selected may be high, that is, the rate at which the change indication effect of the success mode is performed, or the rate at which the change indication effect of the success mode is continuous may be high. In addition, the change indication effect of a specific type (for example, an effect that a character X with a low appearance frequency appears) in the case where the setting value is high (4 to 6) as compared to the case where the setting value is low (1-3) The rate at which is executed may be increased.

1 ... pachinko gaming machine 2 ... gaming board 3 ... gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 6A ... winning ball device 6B ... variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... game effect lamp 10 ... general winning opening 11 ... main board 12 ... effect control board 13 ... voice control board 14 ... lamp control board 15 ... relay board 20 ... normal symbol display 21 ... gate switch 22A, 22B ... start opening Switch 23 ... count switch 30 ... hitting operation handle 31A ... stick controller 31 B ... push button 32 ... movable body 100 ... microcomputer for game control 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display,
Display control means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to variable display;
A change suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a change suggestion effect that suggests that the mode of the corresponding display changes
The said change indication production execution means can execute a change indication effect of success mode and a change indication effect of failure mode as a change indication effect,
A game machine characterized in that the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is performed within a predetermined period is different according to the number of executions of the change indication effect of the success mode.

Images